WO2016064201A1 - Pdn type fallback method in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor - Google Patents
Pdn type fallback method in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2016064201A1 WO2016064201A1 PCT/KR2015/011168 KR2015011168W WO2016064201A1 WO 2016064201 A1 WO2016064201 A1 WO 2016064201A1 KR 2015011168 W KR2015011168 W KR 2015011168W WO 2016064201 A1 WO2016064201 A1 WO 2016064201A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- pdn
- terminal
- type
- procedure
- pdn type
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Ceased
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W24/00—Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
- H04W24/04—Arrangements for maintaining operational condition
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W76/00—Connection management
- H04W76/30—Connection release
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W60/00—Affiliation to network, e.g. registration; Terminating affiliation with the network, e.g. de-registration
- H04W60/06—De-registration or detaching
Definitions
- the present invention relates to a wireless communication system, and more particularly, to a method for performing or supporting a fallback of a PDN type to a PDN type capable of normal operation of a failed PDN type. It is about supporting devices.
- Mobile communication systems have been developed to provide voice services while ensuring user activity.
- the mobile communication system has expanded not only voice but also data service.As a result of the explosive increase in traffic, a shortage of resources and users are demanding higher speed services, a more advanced mobile communication system is required. have.
- An object of the present invention is to propose a method for falling back a PDN type from a failed PDN type to a PDN type capable of normal operation.
- a Home Subscriber Server (HSS) in a wireless communication system falls back to a second PDN type capable of normal operation from a failure of a first Packet Data Network (PDN) type.
- PDN Packet Data Network
- the method for fallback after detecting the occurrence of the failure of the first PDN type, if there is a terminal with voice call (voice call) transmission and reception, PDN allocated for the PDN connection established by the terminal preferentially Determining whether all of the types are the first PDN type, Detach with re-attach procedure with re-attachment depending on whether all the PDN types allocated to the PDN connection of the terminal is the first PDN type Or determining any one of a disconnection with re-activation procedure involving the re-activation and initiating the determined procedure.
- a home subscribe server for falling back a failed Packet Data Network (PDN) type to a second PDN type capable of normal operation in a wireless communication system (HSS)
- a Home Subscriber Server comprising: a communication module for transmitting and receiving signals and a processor for controlling the communication module, wherein the processor detects a failure of the first PDN type and then voices a voice call.
- a detach with re-attach procedure may be determined.
- the mobility management entity sends a Cancel Location message including an HSS initiated detach or an IP version change or a PDN type change as a cause value.
- MME Mobility Management Entity
- the MME may belong to a Visited Public Land Mobile Network (VPLMN).
- VPLMN Visited Public Land Mobile Network
- the Cancel Location message may indicate the first PDN type as a PDN type in which a failure occurs, or indicate the second PDN type as a PDN type in which normal operation is possible.
- the terminal may be connected to a PDN GW (Packet Data Network Gateway) for allocating the second PDN type by the MME.
- PDN GW Packet Data Network Gateway
- a disconnection with re-activation procedure for the PDN to which the first PDN type is assigned Can be determined.
- a PDN disconnect request including a relocation message or a Cancel Location message containing a bearer deactivation with reactivation requested with a cause value may be transmitted to a mobility management entity (MME).
- MME mobility management entity
- the MME may belong to a Visited Public Land Mobile Network (VPLMN).
- VPLMN Visited Public Land Mobile Network
- the Cancel Location message may indicate the first PDN type as a PDN type in which a failure occurs, or indicate the second PDN type as a PDN type in which normal operation is possible.
- the terminal may be connected to a PDN Packet Data Network Gateway (GW) that allocates the second PDN type by the MME during a PDN connectivity procedure by the terminal.
- GW Packet Data Network Gateway
- the mobile communication service can be smoothly performed by falling back the PDN type to the PDN type capable of normal operation from the failed PDN type.
- the PDN type fallback procedure may be more efficiently performed by determining a procedure of falling back a PDN type suitable for a terminal.
- the voice call transmission and reception service may be smoothly provided by first falling back the terminal where the voice call is generated.
- FIG. 1 is a view briefly illustrating an EPS (Evolved Packet System) to which the present invention can be applied.
- EPS Evolved Packet System
- E-UTRAN evolved universal terrestrial radio access network
- FIG. 3 illustrates the structure of an E-UTRAN and an EPC in a wireless communication system to which the present invention can be applied.
- FIG. 4 shows a structure of a radio interface protocol between a terminal and an E-UTRAN in a wireless communication system to which the present invention can be applied.
- FIG. 5 shows an S1 interface protocol structure in a wireless communication system to which the present invention can be applied.
- FIG. 6 is a diagram exemplarily illustrating a structure of a physical channel in a wireless communication system to which the present invention can be applied.
- FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating EMM and ECM states in a wireless communication system to which the present invention can be applied.
- FIG. 8 illustrates a bearer structure in a wireless communication system to which the present invention can be applied.
- FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a transmission path of a control plane and a user plane in an EMM registered state in a wireless communication system to which the present invention can be applied.
- FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a contention based random access procedure in a wireless communication system to which the present invention can be applied.
- FIG. 11 is a diagram briefly illustrating an attach procedure in a wireless communication system to which the present invention may be applied.
- FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating a UE requested PDN connectivity procedure in a wireless communication system to which the present invention can be applied.
- FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a method for informing a HSS of a PDN type according to an embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a PDN type fallback method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
- 15 is a diagram illustrating a PDN type fallback method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
- 16 is a diagram illustrating a PDN type fallback method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
- 17 and 18 illustrate a block diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
- a base station has a meaning as a terminal node of a network that directly communicates with a terminal.
- the specific operation described as performed by the base station in this document may be performed by an upper node of the base station in some cases. That is, it is obvious that various operations performed for communication with a terminal in a network composed of a plurality of network nodes including a base station may be performed by the base station or other network nodes other than the base station.
- a 'base station (BS)' may be replaced by terms such as a fixed station, a Node B, an evolved-NodeB (eNB), a base transceiver system (BTS), an access point (AP), and the like. .
- a 'terminal' may be fixed or mobile, and may include a user equipment (UE), a mobile station (MS), a user terminal (UT), a mobile subscriber station (MSS), a subscriber station (SS), and an AMS ( Advanced Mobile Station (WT), Wireless Terminal (WT), Machine-Type Communication (MTC) Device, Machine-to-Machine (M2M) Device, Device-to-Device (D2D) Device, etc.
- UE user equipment
- MS mobile station
- UT user terminal
- MSS mobile subscriber station
- SS subscriber station
- AMS Advanced Mobile Station
- WT Wireless Terminal
- MTC Machine-Type Communication
- M2M Machine-to-Machine
- D2D Device-to-Device
- downlink means communication from a base station to a terminal
- uplink means communication from a terminal to a base station.
- a transmitter may be part of a base station, and a receiver may be part of a terminal.
- a transmitter may be part of a terminal and a receiver may be part of a base station.
- CDMA code division multiple access
- FDMA frequency division multiple access
- TDMA time division multiple access
- OFDMA orthogonal frequency division multiple access
- SC-FDMA single carrier frequency division multiple access
- GSM global system for mobile communications
- GPRS general packet radio service
- EDGE enhanced data rates for GSM evolution
- OFDMA may be implemented in a wireless technology such as IEEE 802.11 (Wi-Fi), IEEE 802.16 (WiMAX), IEEE 802-20, evolved UTRA (E-UTRA).
- UTRA is part of a universal mobile telecommunications system (UMTS).
- 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP) long term evolution (LTE) is a part of evolved UMTS (E-UMTS) using E-UTRA, and employs OFDMA in downlink and SC-FDMA in uplink.
- LTE-A (advanced) is the evolution of 3GPP LTE.
- Embodiments of the present invention may be supported by standard documents disclosed in at least one of the wireless access systems IEEE 802, 3GPP and 3GPP2. That is, steps or parts which are not described to clearly reveal the technical spirit of the present invention among the embodiments of the present invention may be supported by the above documents. In addition, all terms disclosed in the present document can be described by the above standard document.
- UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunications System
- GSM Global System for Mobile Communication
- Evolved Packet System A network system consisting of an Evolved Packet Core (EPC), which is a packet switched core network based on Internet Protocol (IP), and an access network such as LTE and UTRAN.
- EPC Evolved Packet Core
- IP Internet Protocol
- UMTS is an evolutionary network.
- NodeB base station of UMTS network. It is installed outdoors and its coverage is macro cell size.
- eNodeB base station of EPS network. It is installed outdoors and its coverage is macro cell size.
- a terminal may be referred to in terms of terminal, mobile equipment (ME), mobile station (MS), and the like.
- the terminal may be a portable device such as a laptop, a mobile phone, a personal digital assistant (PDA), a smartphone, a multimedia device, or the like, or may be a non-portable device such as a personal computer (PC) or a vehicle-mounted device.
- the term "terminal” or “terminal” in the MTC related content may refer to an MTC terminal.
- IMS IP Multimedia Subsystem
- IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity
- Machine Type Communication Communication performed by a machine without human intervention. It may also be referred to as M2M (Machine to Machine) communication.
- MTC terminal (MTC UE or MTC device or MTC device): a terminal having a communication function through a mobile communication network and performing an MTC function (for example, a vending machine, a meter reading device, etc.).
- MTC server A server on a network that manages an MTC terminal. It may exist inside or outside the mobile communication network. It may have an interface that an MTC user can access. In addition, the MTC server may provide MTC related services to other servers (Services Capability Server (SCS)), or the MTC server may be an MTC application server.
- SCS Services Capability Server
- MTC mobile broadband
- services e.g., remote meter reading, volume movement tracking, weather sensors, etc.
- (MTC) application server a server on a network where (MTC) applications run
- MTC feature A function of a network to support an MTC application.
- MTC monitoring is a feature for preparing for loss of equipment in an MTC application such as a remote meter reading
- low mobility is a feature for an MTC application for an MTC terminal such as a vending machine.
- MTC subscriber An entity having a connection relationship with a network operator and providing a service to one or more MTC terminals.
- MTC group A group of MTC terminals that share at least one MTC feature and belongs to an MTC subscriber.
- SCS Services Capability Server
- External Identifier An identifier used by an external entity (e.g., an SCS or application server) of a 3GPP network to point to (or identify) an MTC terminal (or a subscriber to which the MTC terminal belongs). Globally unique.
- the external identifier is composed of a domain identifier and a local identifier as follows.
- Domain Identifier An identifier for identifying a domain in a control term of a mobile communication network operator.
- One provider may use a domain identifier for each service to provide access to different services.
- Local Identifier An identifier used to infer or obtain an International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI). Local identifiers must be unique within the application domain and are managed by the mobile telecommunications network operator.
- IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity
- RAN Radio Access Network: a unit including a Node B, a Radio Network Controller (RNC), and an eNodeB controlling the Node B in a 3GPP network. It exists at the terminal end and provides connection to the core network.
- RNC Radio Network Controller
- HLR Home Location Register
- HSS Home Subscriber Server
- RANAP RAN Application Part: between the RAN and the node in charge of controlling the core network (ie, Mobility Management Entity (MME) / Serving General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) Supporting Node) / MSC (Mobile Switching Center) Interface.
- MME Mobility Management Entity
- GPRS General Packet Radio Service
- MSC Mobile Switching Center
- PLMN Public Land Mobile Network
- Non-Access Stratum A functional layer for transmitting and receiving signaling and traffic messages between a terminal and a core network in a UMTS and EPS protocol stack. The main function is to support the mobility of the terminal and to support the session management procedure for establishing and maintaining an IP connection between the terminal and the PDN GW.
- FIG. 1 is a diagram briefly illustrating an EPS (Evolved Packet System) to which the present invention may be applied.
- EPS Evolved Packet System
- the network structure diagram of FIG. 1 briefly reconstructs a structure of an EPS (Evolved Packet System) including an Evolved Packet Core (EPC).
- EPS Evolved Packet System
- EPC Evolved Packet Core
- EPC Evolved Packet Core
- SAE System Architecture Evolution
- SAE is a research project to determine network structure supporting mobility between various kinds of networks.
- SAE aims to provide an optimized packet-based system, for example, supporting various radio access technologies on an IP basis and providing improved data transfer capability.
- the EPC is a core network of an IP mobile communication system for a 3GPP LTE system and may support packet-based real-time and non-real-time services.
- a conventional mobile communication system i.e., a second generation or third generation mobile communication system
- the core network is divided into two distinct sub-domains of circuit-switched (CS) for voice and packet-switched (PS) for data.
- CS circuit-switched
- PS packet-switched
- the function has been implemented.
- the sub-domains of CS and PS have been unified into one IP domain.
- the EPC may include various components, and in FIG. 1, some of them correspond to a Serving Gateway (SGW) (or S-GW), PDN GW (Packet Data Network Gateway) (or PGW or P-GW), A mobility management entity (MME), a Serving General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) Supporting Node (SGSN), and an enhanced Packet Data Gateway (ePDG) are shown.
- SGW Serving Gateway
- PDN GW Packet Data Network Gateway
- MME mobility management entity
- GPRS General Packet Radio Service
- SGSN Serving General Packet Radio Service
- ePDG enhanced Packet Data Gateway
- the SGW acts as a boundary point between the radio access network (RAN) and the core network, and is an element that functions to maintain a data path between the eNodeB and the PDN GW.
- the SGW serves as a local mobility anchor point. That is, packets may be routed through the SGW for mobility in the E-UTRAN (Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (Evolved-UMTS) Terrestrial Radio Access Network defined in 3GPP Release-8 or later).
- E-UTRAN Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (Evolved-UMTS) Terrestrial Radio Access Network defined in 3GPP Release-8 or later.
- SGW also provides mobility with other 3GPP networks (RANs defined before 3GPP Release-8, such as UTRAN or GERAN (Global System for Mobile Communication (GSM) / Enhanced Data rates for Global Evolution (EDGE) Radio Access Network). It can also function as an anchor point.
- GSM Global System for Mobile Communication
- EDGE Enhanced Data rates for Global Evolution
- the PDN GW corresponds to the termination point of the data interface towards the packet data network.
- the PDN GW may support policy enforcement features, packet filtering, charging support, and the like.
- untrusted networks such as 3GPP networks and non-3GPP networks (e.g., Interworking Wireless Local Area Networks (I-WLANs), trusted divisions such as Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) networks or Wimax). It can serve as an anchor point for mobility management with the network.
- I-WLANs Interworking Wireless Local Area Networks
- CDMA Code Division Multiple Access
- FIG. 1 shows that the SGW and the PDN GW are configured as separate gateways, two gateways may be implemented according to a single gateway configuration option.
- the MME is an element that performs signaling and control functions for supporting access to a network connection, allocation of network resources, tracking, paging, roaming, handover, and the like.
- the MME controls the control plane functions related to subscriber and session management.
- the MME manages a number of eNodeBs and performs signaling for the selection of a conventional gateway for handover to other 2G / 3G networks.
- the MME also performs functions such as security procedures, terminal-to-network session handling, and idle terminal location management.
- SGSN handles all packet data, such as user's mobility management and authentication to other 3GPP networks (eg GPRS networks).
- 3GPP networks eg GPRS networks.
- the ePDG acts as a secure node for untrusted non-3GPP networks (eg, I-WLAN, WiFi hotspots, etc.).
- untrusted non-3GPP networks eg, I-WLAN, WiFi hotspots, etc.
- a terminal having IP capability includes an IP service network provided by an operator (ie, an operator) via various elements in the EPC, based on 3GPP access as well as non-3GPP access.
- an operator ie, an operator
- 3GPP access based on 3GPP access as well as non-3GPP access.
- IMS IMS
- FIG. 1 illustrates various reference points (eg, S1-U, S1-MME, etc.).
- a conceptual link defining two functions existing in different functional entities of E-UTRAN and EPC is defined as a reference point.
- Table 1 below summarizes the reference points shown in FIG. 1.
- various reference points may exist according to the network structure.
- S2a and S2b correspond to non-3GPP interfaces.
- S2a is a reference point that provides the user plane with relevant control and mobility resources between trusted non-3GPP access and PDN GW.
- S2b is a reference point that provides the user plane with relevant control and mobility support between the ePDG and the PDN GW.
- E-UTRAN evolved universal terrestrial radio access network
- the E-UTRAN system is an evolution from the existing UTRAN system and may be, for example, a 3GPP LTE / LTE-A system.
- Communication networks are widely deployed to provide various communication services, such as voice (eg, Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP)) over IMS and packet data.
- voice eg, Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
- VoIP Voice over Internet Protocol
- an E-UMTS network includes an E-UTRAN, an EPC, and one or more UEs.
- the E-UTRAN consists of eNBs providing a control plane and a user plane protocol to the UE, and the eNBs are connected through an X2 interface.
- X2 user plane interface (X2-U) is defined between eNBs.
- the X2-U interface provides non guaranteed delivery of user plane packet data units (PDUs).
- An X2 control plane interface (X2-CP) is defined between two neighboring eNBs.
- X2-CP performs functions such as context transfer between eNBs, control of user plane tunnel between source eNB and target eNB, delivery of handover related messages, and uplink load management.
- the eNB is connected to the terminal through a wireless interface and is connected to an evolved packet core (EPC) through the S1 interface.
- EPC evolved packet core
- the S1 user plane interface (S1-U) is defined between the eNB and the serving gateway (S-GW).
- the S1 control plane interface (S1-MME) is defined between the eNB and the mobility management entity (MME).
- the S1 interface performs an evolved packet system (EPS) bearer service management function, a non-access stratum (NAS) signaling transport function, network sharing, and MME load balancing function.
- EPS evolved packet system
- NAS non-access stratum
- the S1 interface supports a many-to-many-relation between eNB and MME / S-GW.
- MME provides NAS signaling security, access stratum (AS) security control, inter-CN inter-CN signaling to support mobility between 3GPP access networks, and performing and controlling paging retransmission.
- EWS Earthquake and Tsunami Warning System
- CMAS Commercial Mobile Alert System
- FIG. 3 illustrates the structure of an E-UTRAN and an EPC in a wireless communication system to which the present invention can be applied.
- an eNB may select a gateway (eg, MME), route to the gateway during radio resource control (RRC) activation, scheduling of a broadcast channel (BCH), and the like. Dynamic resource allocation to the UE in transmission, uplink and downlink, and may perform the function of mobility control connection in the LTE_ACTIVE state.
- the gateway is responsible for paging initiation, LTE_IDLE state management, ciphering of the user plane, System Architecture Evolution (SAE) bearer control, and NAS signaling encryption. It can perform the functions of ciphering and integrity protection.
- FIG. 4 shows a structure of a radio interface protocol between a terminal and an E-UTRAN in a wireless communication system to which the present invention can be applied.
- FIG. 4 (a) shows the radio protocol structure for the control plane and FIG. 4 (b) shows the radio protocol structure for the user plane.
- the layers of the air interface protocol between the terminal and the E-UTRAN are based on the lower three layers of the open system interconnection (OSI) standard model known in the art of communication systems. It may be divided into a first layer L1, a second layer L2, and a third layer L3.
- the air interface protocol between the UE and the E-UTRAN consists of a physical layer, a data link layer, and a network layer horizontally, and vertically stacks a protocol stack for transmitting data information. (protocol stack) It is divided into a user plane and a control plane, which is a protocol stack for transmitting control signals.
- the control plane refers to a path through which control messages used by the terminal and the network to manage a call are transmitted.
- the user plane refers to a path through which data generated at an application layer, for example, voice data or Internet packet data, is transmitted.
- an application layer for example, voice data or Internet packet data
- a physical layer which is a first layer (L1), provides an information transfer service to a higher layer by using a physical channel.
- the physical layer is connected to a medium access control (MAC) layer located at a higher level through a transport channel, and data is transmitted between the MAC layer and the physical layer through the transport channel.
- Transport channels are classified according to how and with what characteristics data is transmitted over the air interface.
- data is transmitted between different physical layers through a physical channel between a physical layer of a transmitter and a physical layer of a receiver.
- the physical layer is modulated by an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) scheme and utilizes time and frequency as radio resources.
- OFDM orthogonal frequency division multiplexing
- a physical downlink control channel is a resource allocation of a paging channel (PCH) and a downlink shared channel (DL-SCH) and uplink shared channel (UL-SCH) to the UE.
- PCH paging channel
- DL-SCH downlink shared channel
- UL-SCH uplink shared channel
- the PDCCH may carry an UL grant that informs the UE of resource allocation of uplink transmission.
- PDFICH physical control format indicator channel informs the UE of the number of OFDM symbols used for PDCCHs and is transmitted every subframe.
- a physical HARQ indicator channel (PHICH) carries a HARQ acknowledgment (ACK) / non-acknowledge (NACK) signal in response to uplink transmission.
- the physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) carries uplink control information such as HARQ ACK / NACK, downlink request and channel quality indicator (CQI) for downlink transmission.
- a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) carries a UL-SCH.
- the MAC layer of the second layer provides a service to a radio link control (RLC) layer, which is a higher layer, through a logical channel.
- RLC radio link control
- the MAC layer multiplexes / demultiplexes into a transport block provided as a physical channel on a transport channel of a MAC service data unit (SDU) belonging to the logical channel and mapping between the logical channel and the transport channel.
- SDU MAC service data unit
- the RLC layer of the second layer supports reliable data transmission. Functions of the RLC layer include concatenation, segmentation, and reassembly of RLC SDUs.
- the RLC layer In order to guarantee the various quality of service (QoS) required by the radio bearer (RB), the RLC layer has a transparent mode (TM), an unacknowledged mode (UM) and an acknowledgment mode (AM). There are three modes of operation: acknowledge mode.
- AM RLC provides error correction through an automatic repeat request (ARQ). Meanwhile, when the MAC layer performs an RLC function, the RLC layer may be included as a functional block of the MAC layer.
- the packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer of the second layer (L2) performs user data transmission, header compression, and ciphering functions in the user plane.
- Header compression is relatively large and large in order to allow efficient transmission of Internet protocol (IP) packets, such as IPv4 (internet protocol version 4) or IPv6 (internet protocol version 6), over a small bandwidth wireless interface. It means the function to reduce the IP packet header size that contains unnecessary control information.
- IP Internet protocol
- IPv4 Internet protocol version 4
- IPv6 Internet protocol version 6
- a radio resource control (RRC) layer located at the lowest part of the third layer L3 is defined only in the control plane.
- the RRC layer serves to control radio resources between the terminal and the network.
- the UE and the network exchange RRC messages with each other through the RRC layer.
- the RRC layer controls the logical channel, transport channel and physical channel with respect to configuration, re-configuration and release of radio bearers.
- the radio bearer means a logical path provided by the second layer (L2) for data transmission between the terminal and the network.
- Establishing a radio bearer means defining characteristics of a radio protocol layer and a channel to provide a specific service, and setting each specific parameter and operation method.
- the radio bearer may be further divided into two signaling radio bearers (SRBs) and data radio bearers (DRBs).
- SRB is used as a path for transmitting RRC messages in the control plane
- DRB is used as a path for transmitting user data in the user plane.
- a non-access stratum (NAS) layer located above the RRC layer performs functions such as session management and mobility management.
- NAS non-access stratum
- One cell constituting the base station is set to one of the bandwidth, such as 1.25, 2.5, 5, 10, 20Mhz to provide a downlink or uplink transmission service to multiple terminals.
- Different cells may be configured to provide different bandwidths.
- a downlink transport channel for transmitting data from a network to a terminal includes a broadcast channel (BCH) for transmitting system information, a PCH for transmitting a paging message, and a DL-SCH for transmitting user traffic or control messages.
- BCH broadcast channel
- PCH for transmitting a paging message
- DL-SCH for transmitting user traffic or control messages.
- Traffic or control messages of the downlink multicast or broadcast service may be transmitted through the DL-SCH or may be transmitted through a separate downlink multicast channel (MCH).
- an uplink transport channel for transmitting data from a terminal to a network includes a random access channel (RACH) for transmitting an initial control message, and an UL-SCH (uplink shared) for transmitting user traffic or a control message. channel).
- RACH random access channel
- UL-SCH uplink shared
- the logical channel is on top of the transport channel and is mapped to the transport channel.
- the logical channel may be divided into a control channel for transmitting control region information and a traffic channel for delivering user region information.
- the control channel includes a broadcast control channel (BCCH), a paging control channel (PCCH), a common control channel (CCCH), a dedicated control channel (DCCH), multicast And a control channel (MCCH: multicast control channel).
- Traffic channels include a dedicated traffic channel (DTCH) and a multicast traffic channel (MTCH).
- PCCH is a downlink channel that carries paging information and is used when the network does not know the cell to which the UE belongs.
- CCCH is used by a UE that does not have an RRC connection with the network.
- the DCCH is a point-to-point bi-directional channel used by a terminal having an RRC connection for transferring dedicated control information between the UE and the network.
- DTCH is a point-to-point channel dedicated to one terminal for transmitting user information that may exist in uplink and downlink.
- MTCH is a point-to-multipoint downlink channel for carrying traffic data from the network to the UE.
- the DCCH may be mapped to the UL-SCH
- the DTCH may be mapped to the UL-SCH
- the CCCH may be mapped to the UL-SCH.
- the BCCH may be mapped with the BCH or DL-SCH
- the PCCH may be mapped with the PCH
- the DCCH may be mapped with the DL-SCH.
- the DTCH may be mapped with the DL-SCH
- the MCCH may be mapped with the MCH
- the MTCH may be mapped with the MCH.
- FIG. 5 shows an S1 interface protocol structure in a wireless communication system to which the present invention can be applied.
- FIG. 5A illustrates a control plane protocol stack in an S1 interface
- FIG. 5B illustrates a user plane interface protocol structure in an S1 interface.
- the S1 control plane interface (S1-MME) is defined between the base station and the MME. Similar to the user plane, the transport network layer is based on IP transport. However, it is added to the SCTP (Stream Control Transmission Protocol) layer above the IP layer for reliable transmission of message signaling.
- SCTP Stream Control Transmission Protocol
- the application layer signaling protocol is referred to as S1-AP (S1 application protocol).
- the SCTP layer provides guaranteed delivery of application layer messages.
- Point-to-point transmission is used at the transport IP layer for protocol data unit (PDU) signaling transmission.
- PDU protocol data unit
- a single SCTP association per S1-MME interface instance uses a pair of stream identifiers for the S-MME common procedure. Only some pairs of stream identifiers are used for the S1-MME dedicated procedure.
- the MME communication context identifier is assigned by the MME for the S1-MME dedicated procedure, and the eNB communication context identifier is assigned by the eNB for the S1-MME dedicated procedure.
- the MME communication context identifier and the eNB communication context identifier are used to distinguish the UE-specific S1-MME signaling transmission bearer. Communication context identifiers are each carried in an S1-AP message.
- the MME changes the state of the terminal that used the signaling connection to the ECM-IDLE state. And, the eNB releases the RRC connection of the terminal.
- S1 user plane interface (S1-U) is defined between the eNB and the S-GW.
- the S1-U interface provides non-guaranteed delivery of user plane PDUs between the eNB and the S-GW.
- the transport network layer is based on IP transmission, and a GPRS Tunneling Protocol User Plane (GTP-U) layer is used above the UDP / IP layer to transfer user plane PDUs between the eNB and the S-GW.
- GTP-U GPRS Tunneling Protocol User Plane
- FIG. 6 is a diagram exemplarily illustrating a structure of a physical channel in a wireless communication system to which the present invention can be applied.
- a physical channel transmits signaling and data through a radio resource including one or more subcarriers in a frequency domain and one or more symbols in a time domain.
- One subframe having a length of 1.0 ms is composed of a plurality of symbols.
- the specific symbol (s) of the subframe eg, the first symbol of the subframe
- the PDCCH carries information about dynamically allocated resources (eg, a resource block, a modulation and coding scheme (MCS), etc.).
- MCS modulation and coding scheme
- EMM EPS mobility management
- ECM EPS connection management
- FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating EMM and ECM states in a wireless communication system to which the present invention can be applied.
- an EMM registered state (EMM-REGISTERED) according to whether a UE is attached or detached from a network in order to manage mobility of the UE in a NAS layer located in a control plane of the UE and the MME.
- EMM deregistration state (EMM-DEREGISTERED) may be defined.
- the EMM-REGISTERED state and the EMM-DEREGISTERED state may be applied to the terminal and the MME.
- the initial terminal is in the EMM-DEREGISTERED state, and the terminal performs a process of registering with the corresponding network through an initial attach procedure to access the network. If the access procedure is successfully performed, the UE and the MME are transitioned to the EMM-REGISTERED state. In addition, when the terminal is powered off or the radio link fails (when the packet error rate exceeds the reference value on the wireless link), the terminal is detached from the network and transitioned to the EMM-DEREGISTERED state.
- ECM-connected state and an ECM idle state may be defined to manage a signaling connection between the terminal and the network.
- ECM-CONNECTED state and ECM-IDLE state may also be applied to the UE and the MME.
- the ECM connection consists of an RRC connection established between the terminal and the base station and an S1 signaling connection established between the base station and the MME. In other words, when the ECM connection is set / released, it means that both the RRC connection and the S1 signaling connection are set / released.
- the RRC state indicates whether the RRC layer of the terminal and the RRC layer of the base station are logically connected. That is, when the RRC layer of the terminal and the RRC layer of the base station is connected, the terminal is in the RRC connected state (RRC_CONNECTED). If the RRC layer of the terminal and the RRC layer of the base station is not connected, the terminal is in the RRC idle state (RRC_IDLE).
- the network can grasp the existence of the terminal in the ECM-CONNECTED state in units of cells and can effectively control the terminal.
- the network cannot grasp the existence of the UE in the ECM-IDLE state, and manages the core network (CN) in a tracking area unit that is a larger area than the cell.
- the terminal When the terminal is in the ECM idle state, the terminal performs Discontinuous Reception (DRX) set by the NAS using an ID assigned only in the tracking area. That is, the UE may receive broadcast of system information and paging information by monitoring a paging signal at a specific paging occasion every UE-specific paging DRX cycle.
- DRX Discontinuous Reception
- the network does not have context information of the terminal. Accordingly, the UE in the ECM-IDLE state may perform a terminal-based mobility related procedure such as cell selection or cell reselection without receiving a command from the network.
- the terminal In the ECM idle state, when the location of the terminal is different from the location known by the network, the terminal may inform the network of the location of the terminal through a tracking area update (TAU) procedure.
- TAU tracking area update
- the network knows the cell to which the UE belongs. Accordingly, the network may transmit and / or receive data to or from the terminal, control mobility such as handover of the terminal, and perform cell measurement on neighbor cells.
- the terminal needs to transition to the ECM-CONNECTED state in order to receive a normal mobile communication service such as voice or data.
- the initial terminal is in the ECM-IDLE state as in the EMM state, and when the terminal is successfully registered in the network through an initial attach procedure, the terminal and the MME are in the ECM connection state. Transition is made.
- the terminal is registered in the network but the traffic is inactivated and the radio resources are not allocated, the terminal is in the ECM-IDLE state, and if a new traffic is generated uplink or downlink to the terminal, a service request procedure UE and MME is transitioned to the ECM-CONNECTED state through.
- FIG. 8 illustrates a bearer structure in a wireless communication system to which the present invention can be applied.
- PDN packet date network
- EPS Packet Data Network
- the EPS bearer is a transmission path of traffic generated between the UE and the PDN GW in order to deliver user traffic in EPS.
- One or more EPS bearers may be set per terminal.
- Each EPS bearer may be divided into an E-UTRAN radio access bearer (E-RAB) and an S5 / S8 bearer, and the E-RAB is divided into a radio bearer (RB: radio bearer) and an S1 bearer. Can lose. That is, one EPS bearer corresponds to one RB, S1 bearer, and S5 / S8 bearer, respectively.
- E-RAB E-UTRAN radio access bearer
- S5 / S8 bearer an S5 / S8 bearer
- RB radio bearer
- the E-RAB delivers the packet of the EPS bearer between the terminal and the EPC. If there is an E-RAB, the E-RAB bearer and the EPS bearer are mapped one-to-one.
- a data radio bearer (DRB) transfers a packet of an EPS bearer between a terminal and an eNB. If the DRB exists, the DRB and the EPS bearer / E-RAB are mapped one-to-one.
- the S1 bearer delivers the packet of the EPS bearer between the eNB and the S-GW.
- the S5 / S8 bearer delivers an EPS bearer packet between the S-GW and the P-GW.
- the UE binds a service data flow (SDF) to the EPS bearer in the uplink direction.
- SDF is an IP flow or collection of IP flows that classifies (or filters) user traffic by service.
- a plurality of SDFs may be multiplexed onto the same EPS bearer by including a plurality of uplink packet filters.
- the terminal stores mapping information between the uplink packet filter and the DRB in order to bind between the SDF and the DRB in the uplink.
- P-GW binds SDF to EPS bearer in downlink direction.
- a plurality of SDFs may be multiplexed on the same EPS bearer by including a plurality of downlink packet filters.
- the P-GW stores the mapping information between the downlink packet filter and the S5 / S8 bearer to bind between the SDF and the S5 / S8 bearer in the downlink.
- the eNB stores a one-to-one mapping between the DRB and the S1 bearer to bind between the DRB and the S1 bearer in the uplink / downlink.
- S-GW stores one-to-one mapping information between S1 bearer and S5 / S8 bearer in order to bind between S1 bearer and S5 / S8 bearer in uplink / downlink.
- EPS bearers are classified into two types: a default bearer and a dedicated bearer.
- the terminal may have one default bearer and one or more dedicated bearers per PDN.
- the minimum default bearer of the EPS session for one PDN is called a default bearer.
- the EPS bearer may be classified based on an identifier.
- EPS bearer identity is assigned by the terminal or the MME.
- the dedicated bearer (s) is combined with the default bearer by Linked EPS Bearer Identity (LBI).
- LBI Linked EPS Bearer Identity
- a PDN connection is generated by assigning an IP address, and a default bearer is generated in the EPS section. Even if there is no traffic between the terminal and the corresponding PDN, the default bearer is not released unless the terminal terminates the PDN connection, and the default bearer is released when the corresponding PDN connection is terminated.
- the bearer of all sections constituting the terminal and the default bearer is not activated, the S5 bearer directly connected to the PDN is maintained, the E-RAB bearer (ie DRB and S1 bearer) associated with the radio resource is Is released. When new traffic is generated in the corresponding PDN, the E-RAB bearer is reset to deliver the traffic.
- the terminal uses a service (for example, the Internet, etc.) through a default bearer
- the terminal may use an insufficient service (for example, Videon on Demand (VOD), etc.) to receive a Quality of Service (QoS) with only the default bearer.
- Dedicated bearer is generated when the terminal requests (on-demand). If there is no traffic of the terminal dedicated bearer is released.
- the terminal or the network may generate a plurality of dedicated bearers as needed.
- the IP flow may have different QoS characteristics depending on what service the UE uses.
- the network determines the allocation of network resources or a control policy for QoS at the time of establishing / modifying an EPS session for the terminal and applies it while the EPS session is maintained. This is called PCC (Policy and Charging Control). PCC rules are determined based on operator policy (eg, QoS policy, gate status, charging method, etc.).
- PCC rules are determined in units of SDF. That is, the IP flow may have different QoS characteristics according to the service used by the terminal, IP flows having the same QoS are mapped to the same SDF, and the SDF becomes a unit for applying the PCC rule.
- PCC Policy and Charging Control Function
- PCEF Policy and Charging Enforcement Function
- PCRF determines PCC rules for each SDF when creating or changing EPS sessions and provides them to the P-GW (or PCEF). After setting the PCC rule for the SDF, the P-GW detects the SDF for each IP packet transmitted and received and applies the PCC rule for the SDF. When the SDF is transmitted to the terminal via the EPS, it is mapped to an EPS bearer capable of providing a suitable QoS according to the QoS rules stored in the P-GW.
- PCC rules are divided into dynamic PCC rules and pre-defined PCC rules. Dynamic PCC rules are provided dynamically from PCRF to P-GW upon EPS session establishment / modification. On the other hand, the predefined PCC rule is preset in the P-GW and activated / deactivated by the PCRF.
- the EPS bearer includes a QoS Class Identifier (QCI) and Allocation and Retention Priority (ARP) as basic QoS parameters.
- QCI QoS Class Identifier
- ARP Allocation and Retention Priority
- QCI is a scalar that is used as a reference to access node-specific parameters that control bearer level packet forwarding treatment, and the scalar value is pre-configured by the network operator.
- a scalar may be preset to any one of integer values 1-9.
- ARP The main purpose of ARP is to determine if a bearer's establishment or modification request can be accepted or rejected if resources are limited.
- ARP can be used to determine which bearer (s) to drop by the eNB in exceptional resource constraints (eg, handover, etc.).
- the EPS bearer is classified into a guaranteed bit rate (GBR) type bearer and a non-guaranteed bit rate (non-GBR) type bearer according to the QCI resource type.
- the default bearer may always be a non-GBR type bearer, and the dedicated bearer may be a GBR type or non-GBR type bearer.
- GBR bearer has GBR and Maximum Bit Rate (MBR) as QoS parameters in addition to QCI and ARP.
- MBR means that fixed resources are allocated to each bearer (bandwidth guarantee).
- MBR MBR: Aggregated MBR
- AMBR Aggregated MBR
- the QoS of the EPS bearer is determined as above, the QoS of each bearer is determined for each interface. Since the bearer of each interface provides QoS of the EPS bearer for each interface, the EPS bearer, the RB, and the S1 bearer all have a one-to-one relationship.
- FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a transmission path of a control plane and a user plane in an EMM registered state in a wireless communication system to which the present invention can be applied.
- FIG. 9 (a) illustrates the ECM-CONNECTED state
- FIG. 9 (b) illustrates the ECM-IDLE.
- the terminal When the terminal successfully attaches to the network and becomes the EMM-Registered state, the terminal receives the service using the EPS bearer.
- the EPS bearer is configured by divided into DRB, S1 bearer, S5 bearer for each interval.
- a NAS signaling connection that is, an ECM connection (that is, an RRC connection and an S1 signaling connection) is established.
- an S11 GTP-C (GPRS Tunneling Protocol Control Plane) connection is established between the MME and the SGW, and an S5 GTP-C connection is established between the SGW and the PDN GW.
- GTP-C GPRS Tunneling Protocol Control Plane
- the DRB, S1 bearer, and S5 bearer are all configured (ie, radio or network resource allocation).
- the ECM connection (that is, the RRC connection and the S1 signaling connection) is released.
- the S11 GTP-C connection between the MME and the SGW and the S5 GTP-C connection between the SGW and the PDN GW are maintained.
- both the DRB and the S1 bearer are released, but the S5 bearer maintains the configuration (ie, radio or network resource allocation).
- the random access procedure is used for the terminal to obtain uplink synchronization with the base station or to receive uplink radio resources.
- the terminal After the terminal is powered on, the terminal acquires downlink synchronization with the initial cell and receives system information. From the system information, a set of available random access preambles and information about radio resources used for transmission of the random access preambles are obtained.
- the radio resource used for the transmission of the random access preamble may be specified by a combination of at least one subframe index and an index on the frequency domain.
- the terminal transmits a random access preamble selected randomly from the set of random access preambles, and the base station receiving the random access preamble sends a timing alignment (TA) value for uplink synchronization to the terminal through a random access response. As a result, the terminal acquires uplink synchronization.
- TA timing alignment
- the random access procedure is a common procedure in frequency division duplex (FDD) and time division duplex (TDD).
- FDD frequency division duplex
- TDD time division duplex
- the random access procedure is irrelevant to the cell size, and is independent of the number of serving cells when carrier aggregation (CA) is configured.
- a case where the UE performs a random access procedure may be as follows.
- a common consideration is to apply a timing advance (TA) value applicable to one specific cell (eg, a Pcell) to a plurality of cells in a wireless access system supporting carrier aggregation.
- the UE may merge a plurality of cells belonging to different frequency bands (that is, largely spaced on the frequency) or a plurality of cells having different propagation characteristics.
- a small cell or a secondary base station such as a remote radio header (RRH) (ie, a repeater), a femto cell, or a pico cell may be used to expand coverage or remove coverage holes.
- RRH remote radio header
- a secondary eNB (SeNB: secondary eNB)
- the terminal communicates with a base station (ie, macro eNB) through one cell, and when communicating with a secondary base station through another cell, Cells may have different propagation delay characteristics.
- a base station ie, macro eNB
- Cells may have different propagation delay characteristics.
- it may be desirable to have a plurality of TAs in a CA situation in which a plurality of cells are merged.
- 3GPP Rel-11 it is considered that an TA is independently allocated to a specific cell group unit to support multiple TAs. do.
- the TAG may include one or more cells, and the same TA may be commonly applied to one or more cells included in the TAG.
- a MAC TA command control element is composed of a 2-bit TAG identifier (TAG ID) and a 6-bit TA command field.
- the UE When the UE for which carrier aggregation is configured performs the random access procedure described above with respect to the PCell, the UE performs the random access procedure.
- a TAG ie, a pTAG: primary TAG
- all cell (s) in the pTAG are replaced with a TA determined based on the Pcell or adjusted through a random access procedure accompanying the Pcell.
- a TAG ie, sTAG: secondary TAG
- a TA determined based on a specific S cell in the sTAG may be applied to all cell (s) in the sTAG, where TA is a base station.
- the SCell is configured as an RACH resource
- the base station requests an RACH access from the SCell to determine the TA. That is, the base station initiates the RACH transmission on the S cells by the PDCCH order transmitted in the P cell.
- the response message for the SCell preamble is transmitted through the Pcell using the RA-RNTI.
- the UE may apply the TA determined based on the SCell that has successfully completed the random access to all cell (s) in the corresponding sTAG. As such, the random access procedure may be performed in the SCell to obtain a timing alignment of the sTAG to which the SCell belongs.
- a contention-based random access procedure in which the UE randomly selects and uses one preamble within a specific set And a non-contention based random access procedure using a random access preamble allocated by a base station only to a specific terminal.
- the non- contention based random access procedure may be used only for the terminal positioning and / or the timing advance alignment for the sTAG when requested by the above-described handover procedure, a command of the base station.
- general uplink / downlink transmission occurs.
- a relay node also supports both a contention-based random access procedure and a contention-free random access procedure.
- the relay node performs a random access procedure, it suspends the RN subframe configuration at that point. In other words, this means temporarily discarding the RN subframe configuration. Thereafter, the RN subframe configuration is resumed when the random access procedure is completed successfully.
- FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a contention based random access procedure in a wireless communication system to which the present invention can be applied.
- the UE randomly selects one random access preamble (RACH preamble) from a set of random access preambles indicated through system information or a handover command, and A physical RACH (PRACH) resource capable of transmitting a random access preamble is selected and transmitted.
- RACH preamble random access preamble
- PRACH physical RACH
- the random access preamble is transmitted in 6 bits in the RACH transmission channel, and the 6 bits are 5 bits of a random identity for identifying the UE transmitting the RACH, and 1 bit (eg, a third for indicating additional information). Message (indicating the size of Msg 3).
- the base station receiving the random access preamble from the terminal decodes the preamble and obtains an RA-RNTI.
- the RA-RNTI associated with the PRACH in which the random access preamble is transmitted is determined according to the time-frequency resource of the random access preamble transmitted by the corresponding UE.
- the base station transmits a random access response addressed to the RA-RNTI obtained through the preamble on the first message to the terminal.
- the random access response includes a random access preamble index / identifier (UL preamble index / identifier), an UL grant indicating an uplink radio resource, a temporary cell identifier (TC-RNTI), and a time synchronization value.
- TAC time alignment commands
- the TAC is information indicating a time synchronization value that the base station sends to the terminal to maintain uplink time alignment.
- the terminal updates the uplink transmission timing by using the time synchronization value. When the terminal updates the time synchronization, a time alignment timer is started or restarted.
- the UL grant includes an uplink resource allocation and a transmit power command (TPC) used for transmission of a scheduling message (third message), which will be described later. TPC is used to determine the transmit power for the scheduled PUSCH.
- TPC transmit power command
- the base station After the UE transmits the random access preamble, the base station attempts to receive its random access response within the random access response window indicated by the system information or the handover command, and PRACH
- the PDCCH masked by the RA-RNTI corresponding to the PDCCH is detected, and the PDSCH indicated by the detected PDCCH is received.
- the random access response information may be transmitted in the form of a MAC packet data unit (MAC PDU), and the MAC PDU may be transmitted through a PDSCH.
- the PDCCH preferably includes information of a terminal that should receive the PDSCH, frequency and time information of a radio resource of the PDSCH, a transmission format of the PDSCH, and the like. As described above, once the UE successfully detects the PDCCH transmitted to the UE, the UE can properly receive the random access response transmitted to the PDSCH according to the information of the PDCCH.
- the random access response window refers to a maximum time period in which a terminal that transmits a preamble waits to receive a random access response message.
- the random access response window has a length of 'ra-ResponseWindowSize' starting from subframes after three subframes in the last subframe in which the preamble is transmitted. That is, the UE waits to receive a random access response during the random access window obtained after three subframes from the subframe in which the preamble is terminated.
- the terminal may acquire a random access window size ('ra-ResponseWindowsize') parameter value through system information, and the random access window size may be determined as a value between 2 and 10.
- the monitoring stops the random access response.
- the random access response message is not received until the random access response window ends, or if a valid random access response having the same random access preamble identifier as the random access preamble transmitted to the base station is not received, the random access response is received. Is considered to have failed, and then the UE may perform preamble retransmission.
- the reason why the random access preamble identifier is needed in the random access response is that the UL grant, the TC-RNTI, and the TAC are used by any terminal because one random access response may include random access response information for one or more terminals. This is because we need to know if it is valid.
- the terminal When the terminal receives a valid random access response to the terminal, it processes each of the information included in the random access response. That is, the terminal applies the TAC, and stores the TC-RNTI. In addition, by using the UL grant, the data stored in the buffer of the terminal or newly generated data is transmitted to the base station.
- an RRC connection request generated in the RRC layer and delivered through the CCCH may be included in the third message and transmitted, and in the case of an RRC connection reestablishment procedure, an RRC generated in the RRC layer and delivered through the CCCH
- the connection reestablishment request may be included in the third message and transmitted. It may also include a NAS connection request message.
- the third message should include the identifier of the terminal.
- the contention-based random access procedure it is not possible to determine which terminals perform the random access procedure in the base station, because the terminal needs to be identified for future collision resolution.
- the UE There are two methods for including the identifier of the terminal.
- C-RNTI valid cell identifier
- the UE transmits its cell identifier through an uplink transmission signal corresponding to the UL grant. do.
- the UE transmits its own unique identifier (eg, S-TMSI or random number).
- the unique identifier is longer than the C-RNTI. Terminal specific scrambling is used for transmission on the UL-SCH.
- the terminal has not yet been assigned a C-RNTI, scrambling cannot be based on the C-RNTI, and the TC-RNTI received in the random access response is used instead. If the UE transmits data corresponding to the UL grant, it starts a timer for contention resolution (contention resolution timer).
- the base station When the base station receives the C-RNTI of the terminal through the third message from the terminal, the base station transmits a fourth message to the terminal using the received C-RNTI.
- the unique identifier ie, S-TMSI or random number
- the fourth message is transmitted using the TC-RNTI allocated to the terminal in the random access response. Send to the terminal.
- the fourth message may correspond to an RRC connection setup message including a C-RNTI.
- the terminal After transmitting the data including its identifier through the UL grant included in the random access response, the terminal waits for an instruction of the base station to resolve the collision. That is, it attempts to receive a PDCCH to receive a specific message.
- the third message transmitted in response to the UL grant is its C-RNTI
- the identifier is a unique identifier (that is, In the case of S-TMSI or a random number, it attempts to receive the PDCCH using the TC-RNTI included in the random access response.
- the terminal determines that the random access procedure has been normally performed, and terminates the random access procedure.
- the terminal determines that the random access procedure has been normally performed, and terminates the random access procedure.
- the terminal determines that the random access procedure is normally performed, and terminates the random access procedure.
- the terminal acquires the C-RNTI through the fourth message, and then the terminal and the network transmit and receive a terminal-specific message using the C-RNTI.
- the reason for collision in performing random access is basically because the number of random access preambles is finite. That is, since the base station cannot grant the UE-specific random access preamble to all the UEs, the UE randomly selects and transmits one of the common random access preambles. Accordingly, when two or more terminals select and transmit the same random access preamble through the same radio resource (PRACH resource), the base station determines that one random access preamble is transmitted from one terminal. For this reason, the base station transmits a random access response to the terminal and predicts that the random access response will be received by one terminal. However, as described above, since collision may occur, two or more terminals receive one random access response, and thus, each terminal performs an operation according to reception of a random access response.
- PRACH resource radio resource
- contention resolution contention resolution
- One method is to use a contention resolution timer, and the other is to transmit an identifier of a successful terminal to the terminals.
- the former case is used when the terminal already has a unique C-RNTI before the random access procedure. That is, the terminal already having the C-RNTI transmits data including its C-RNTI to the base station according to the random access response, and operates the collision resolution timer.
- the UE determines that the UE has succeeded in the competition and ends the random access normally.
- the collision resolution method that is, a method of transmitting an identifier of a successful terminal is used when the terminal does not have a unique cell identifier before the random access procedure. That is, when the UE itself does not have a cell identifier, the UE transmits data including an identifier higher than the cell identifier (S-TMSI or random number) according to UL Grant information included in the random access response, and the UE operates a collision resolution timer. Let's do it.
- the terminal determines that the random access procedure is successful. On the other hand, if the conflict resolution timer is not expired, if the data including its higher identifier is not transmitted to the DL-SCH, the UE is determined that the random access process has failed.
- the operation in the non-competitive random access procedure ends the random access procedure only by transmitting the first message and transmitting the second message.
- the terminal before the terminal transmits the random access preamble to the base station as the first message, the terminal is allocated a random access preamble from the base station, and transmits the allocated random access preamble to the base station as a first message and from the base station.
- the random access procedure is terminated by receiving the random access response.
- the network generates a PDN connection (or EPS session, IP session) and a packet data network (PDN) suitable for the purpose of packet data to be transmitted and received by the terminal, and bearers within the corresponding PDN connection. ) To send packets.
- PDN packet data network
- the PDN means an external IP network interconnected with the EPC through the P-GW.
- the Internet an IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS), and the like may correspond thereto.
- IMS IP Multimedia Subsystem
- the PDN connection means an association between a terminal represented by one IPv4 address and / or one IPv6 prefix and a PDN represented by an access point name (APN). That is, the PDN connection means a connection between the terminal and the PDN.
- APN access point name
- the PDN connection is established between the UE and the PDN through an attach procedure or a UE requested PDN connectivity procedure. That is, in order for the terminal to be connected to the PDN, the terminal is assigned a PDN address (ie, an IP address of the terminal to be used in the corresponding PDN).
- the network creates a default bearer in one PDN connection and a PDN connection as a default between the UE and the PDN, and the IP address of the UE is generated in the process of creating a default bearer between the P-GW and the UE. It is generated in the P-GW and delivered to the terminal.
- the terminal receives the service provided by the corresponding PDN using the IP address allocated to the corresponding PDN.
- the basic bearer is maintained until the terminal is released from the network through a detach procedure, and also maintains the IP address assigned to the terminal when accessing the initial mobile communication network. At this time, the terminal is assigned an IP address for each PDN.
- the APN Access Point Name
- the PDN is identified by the APN.
- APNs are classified into network IDs and operator IDs.
- the network ID is used to identify a PDN, such as the Internet or a cooperating VPN, or to identify services provided by the PDN, such as IMS.
- the establishment of the PDN connection may be performed by the MME, and the MME determines which PDN the UE connects to and which P-GW to access in order to establish a PDN connection between the UE and the PDN.
- the MME receives subscription information from the HSS.
- the PDN to which the corresponding UE is connected may be determined.
- the APN is pre-provisioned in the HSS as registration information when the subscriber is registered, and is stored in the MME, S-GW, P-GW, and PCRF as the PDN connection is established when the terminal is initially connected.
- the MME uses the APN to find a gateway (ie, P-GW) to connect the UE to the PDN defined by the APN.
- the default APN is defined as an APN marked by default in subscription information / subscription data. When there is no APN provided to the terminal, it is used in the attach procedure and the UE requested PDN connectivity procedure.
- the MME checks the P-GW to be used by the UE from the HSS when the UE accesses the PDN, and establishes a PDN connection to the UE through the corresponding P-GW.
- the P-GW ID is an identifier used to identify the P-GW and may have an IP address or a fully qualified domain name (FQDN).
- FQDN fully qualified domain name
- PDN 1 eg, the Internet
- PDN 1 the Internet
- the MME requests subscription information of the terminal from the HSS.
- the MME receives the information that the P-GW P-GW 1 for accessing the PDN 1 and PDN 1 which is the default PDN of the terminal from the HSS.
- the MME establishes a PDN connection between the UE and PDN 1 through P-GW 1.
- the MME uses the P-GW ID to identify the P-GW 1. If the P-GW ID is given as the FQDN, the MME may obtain the P-GW IP address through a DNS query. In this case, when the DNS gives the P-GW list, the MME may select one of them according to the P-GW selection policy.
- IPv4 IP Version 4
- IPv6 IP Version 6
- IPv4v6 IP Version 6
- the network may assign an IP address to the terminal during the basic bearer activation in the attach procedure or the UE requested PDN connectivity procedure, and the access procedure of the terminal.
- (Attach Procedure) can also be assigned through the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) procedure.
- DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
- IPv6 PDN type the network performs IPv6 stateless address auto-configuration (SLLAC) procedure for global IPv6 address assignment, and the terminal is a basic service in the attach procedure or UE requested PDN connectivity procedure.
- SLAC IPv6 stateless address auto-configuration
- IID Interface Identifier
- FIG. 11 is a diagram briefly illustrating an attach procedure in a wireless communication system to which the present invention may be applied.
- the attach procedure is generally used to establish a connection to a network when the UE enters an E-UTRAN cell. It may also be used in case of handover from the non-3GPP network to the E-UTRAN.
- the UE initiates the attach procedure by sending an Attach Request message to the MME.
- the attach request message includes an International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) of the terminal, a PDN type requested by the terminal, and the like.
- IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity
- PDN type indicates an IP version (ie, IPv4, IPv4v6, IPv6) requested by the terminal.
- the Attach Request message is included in the RRC Connection Setup Complete message in the RRC connection and delivered, and is included in the Initial UE message in the S1 signaling connection.
- the MME requests and receives information for authentication from the HSS for terminal authentication, and performs mutual authentication with the terminal.
- the MME registers the location of the terminal to the HSS and receives user subscription information (ie, subscribed QoS Profile) from the HSS to create a default bearer for the terminal.
- user subscription information ie, subscribed QoS Profile
- the subscription information does not include IP address information for the corresponding terminal, but in the case of static IP address allocation, the subscription information is fixed assigned to the corresponding terminal. Contains IP address information.
- the MME assigns a default EPS bearer ID and sends a Create Session Request message to the S-GW.
- the Create Session Request message includes the IMSI of the UE, the EPS bearer ID, the P-GW ID selected by the MME for creating the EPS bearer (ie, the P-GW address), the subscription QoS profile received from the APN, and the HSS, and the PDN. Type, IP address (ie, PDN address) of the terminal, and the like.
- the PDN type includes the same PDN type information received from the terminal.
- the IP address of the terminal may be set to 0.
- the static IP address information allocated to the terminal may be Inclusively).
- the S-GW allocates an S5 S-GW Tunnel Endpoint Identifier (TEID) to create an S5 bearer with the P-GW included in the Create Session Request message received from the MME, and the corresponding P-GW. Send a Create Session Request message to the user.
- TEID S5 S-GW Tunnel Endpoint Identifier
- the Create Session Request message includes the IMSI, EPS bearer ID, S5 S-GW TEID, APN, subscription QoS profile, PDN type (i.e., IP version), IP address (i.e., PDN address) of the terminal, and the like. It includes.
- the P-GW allocates an Internet Protocol (IP) address to be used by the terminal and performs a PCRF and IP connectivity access network (IP-CAN) session establishment / modification procedure.
- IP Internet Protocol
- IP-CAN IP connectivity access network
- the P-GW may allocate an IP address selected from the IP address pool owned by the P-GW to the terminal in the case of dynamic IP address allocation, and a static IP address allocation. ),
- the fixed IP address information (included in the subscription information) allocated to the terminal may be identically allocated.
- the P-GW allocates a P-GW Tunnel Endpoint Identifier (TEID) to create an S5 bearer with the S-GW, and sends a session creation response to the S-GW in response to a Create Session Request message. Create Session Response) message.
- TEID P-GW Tunnel Endpoint Identifier
- the Create Session Response message includes an IMSI of the terminal, an EPS bearer ID, an S5 P-GW TEID, a subscription QoS profile, a PDN type, an IP address assigned to the terminal (ie, a PDN address), and the like.
- the P-GW indicates to the UE why the PDN type is modified along with the PDN type.
- the generation of the S5 bearer between the S-GW and the P-GW is completed, and the S-GW may transmit uplink traffic to the P-GW or receive downlink traffic from the P-GW.
- the S-GW allocates the S1 S-GW TEID to create the S1 bearer, and sends a Create Session Response message to the MME in response to the Create Session Request message.
- the Create Session Response message includes an IMSI of the terminal, an EPS bearer ID, an S1 S-GW TEID, a PDN type, an IP address assigned to the terminal (ie, a PDN address), and the like.
- the MME transmits an attach accept message to the terminal in response to an attach request message.
- Attach Accept message includes EPS bearer ID, APN, IP address (ie PDN address) of UE assigned by P-GW, PDN type, Tracking Area Identity (TAI) list, TAU timer, etc. It includes.
- the attach accept message is included in an initial context setup request message in the S1 signaling connection and delivered to the base station.
- the base station After completing this procedure, the generation of the uplink S1 bearer between the base station and the S-GW is completed, the base station can transmit the uplink traffic to the S-GW.
- the attach accept message is included in the RRC connection reconfiguration message in the RRC connection and transmitted from the base station to the terminal.
- the terminal may transmit the uplink traffic to the base station or receive downlink traffic from the base station.
- the base station transmits an initial context setup response message to the MME in response to the initial context setup request message.
- the Initial Context Setup Response message includes an S1 eNB TEID.
- the terminal transmits an Attach Complete message to the MME in response to the Attach Accept message.
- the Attach Complete message is included in the UL Information Transfer message in the RRC connection and transmitted, and is included in the Uplink NAS Transport message in the S1 signaling connection.
- the terminal may transmit the uplink data to the P-GW.
- the MME delivers the S1 eNB TEID received from the base station to the S-GW through a Modify Bearer Request message.
- the base station can receive the downlink traffic from the S-GW.
- bearers are updated between the S-GW and the P-GW.
- the S-GW sends a Modify Bearer Response message to the MME in response to the Modify Bearer Request message.
- the P-GW may transmit the downlink data to the terminal. That is, the terminal may establish a connection with the PDN and receive the PDN service using the assigned IP address.
- the MME sends a Notify Request message to the HSS including the P-GW ID (ie, P-GW address) and APN as needed.
- P-GW ID ie, P-GW address
- APN APN
- the HSS stores the P-GW ID (ie, P-GW address) and associated APN and sends a Notify Response message to the MME.
- P-GW ID ie, P-GW address
- FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating a UE requested PDN connectivity procedure in a wireless communication system to which the present invention can be applied.
- the UE requested PDN connectivity procedure is used for the UE to request connection (including assignment of a default bearer) to an additional PDN through the E-UTRAN.
- the UE initiates a UE Requested PDN procedure by sending a PDN Connectivity Request message to the MME.
- the PDN Connectivity Request message includes an APN, a PDN type (ie, an IP version) requested by the UE, and the like.
- the PDN type indicates the IP version (ie, IPv4, IPv4v6, IPv6) requested by the terminal.
- the MME verifies whether the APN provided by the terminal is allowed by the subscription information. If the terminal does not provide the APN in the PDN Connectivity Request message, the MME uses the APN from the default PDN subscription context.
- the MME assigns an EPS bearer ID and sends a Create Session Request message to the S-GW.
- the Create Session Request message includes the IMSI of the UE, the EPS bearer ID, the P-GW ID selected by the MME for creating the EPS bearer (ie, the P-GW address), the subscription QoS profile received from the APN, and the HSS, and the PDN. Type, IP address (ie, PDN address) of the terminal, and the like.
- the PDN type includes the same PDN type information received from the terminal.
- the IP address of the terminal may be set to 0.
- the static IP address information allocated to the terminal may be Inclusively).
- the S-GW allocates an S5 S-GW Tunnel Endpoint Identifier (TEID) to create an S5 bearer with the P-GW included in the Create Session Request message received from the MME, and the corresponding P-GW. Send a Create Session Request message to the user.
- TEID S5 S-GW Tunnel Endpoint Identifier
- the Create Session Request message includes the IMSI, EPS bearer ID, S5 S-GW TEID, APN, subscription QoS profile, PDN type (i.e., IP version), IP address (i.e., PDN address) of the terminal, and the like. It includes.
- the P-GW allocates an Internet Protocol (IP) address to be used by the terminal and performs a PCRF and IP connectivity access network (IP-CAN) session establishment / modification procedure.
- IP Internet Protocol
- IP-CAN IP connectivity access network
- the P-GW may allocate an IP address selected from the IP address pool owned by the P-GW to the terminal in the case of dynamic IP address allocation, and a static IP address allocation. ),
- the fixed IP address information (included in the subscription information) allocated to the terminal may be identically allocated.
- the P-GW allocates a P-GW Tunnel Endpoint Identifier (TEID) to create an S5 bearer with the S-GW, and responds to the S-GW with a session creation response (in response to a Create Session Request message). Create Session Response) message.
- TEID P-GW Tunnel Endpoint Identifier
- the Create Session Response message includes an IMSI of the terminal, an EPS bearer ID, an S5 P-GW TEID, a subscription QoS profile, a PDN type, an IP address assigned to the terminal (ie, a PDN address), and the like.
- the P-GW indicates to the UE why the PDN type is modified along with the PDN type.
- the generation of the S5 bearer between the S-GW and the P-GW is completed, and the S-GW may transmit uplink traffic to the P-GW or receive downlink traffic from the P-GW.
- the S-GW allocates the S1 S-GW TEID to create the S1 bearer, and sends a Create Session Response message to the MME in response to the Create Session Request message.
- the Create Session Response message includes an IMSI of the terminal, an EPS bearer ID, an S1 S-GW TEID, a PDN type, an IP address assigned to the terminal (ie, a PDN address), and the like.
- the MME transmits a PDN Connectivity Accept message to the UE in response to the PDN Connectivity Request message.
- the PDN Connectivity Accept message includes an EPS bearer ID, an APN, an IP address (ie, a PDN address), a PDN type, etc. of a UE allocated by the P-GW.
- the PDN Connectivity Accept message is included in the bearer setup request message in the S1 signaling connection and delivered to the base station.
- the base station After completing this procedure, the generation of the uplink S1 bearer between the base station and the S-GW is completed, the base station can transmit the uplink traffic to the S-GW.
- the PDN Connectivity Accept message is included in the RRC Connection Reconfiguration message in the RRC connection and transmitted from the base station to the terminal.
- the terminal may transmit the uplink traffic to the base station or receive downlink traffic from the base station.
- the terminal transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration complete message to the base station.
- the base station sends a bearer setup response message to the MME.
- the bearer setup response message includes an S1 eNB TEID.
- the terminal transmits a PDN Connectivity Complete message including the EPS bearer ID to the MME.
- the terminal may transmit the uplink data to the P-GW.
- the MME forwards the S1 eNB TEID received from the base station to the S-GW through a Modify Bearer Request message.
- the base station can receive the downlink traffic from the S-GW.
- the S-GW sends a Modify Bearer Response message to the MME in response to the Modify Bearer Request message.
- the P-GW may transmit the downlink data to the terminal. That is, the terminal may establish a connection with the PDN and receive the PDN service using the assigned IP address.
- the MME sends a Notify Request message to the HSS that includes the P-GW ID (ie, P-GW address) and APN as needed.
- P-GW ID ie, P-GW address
- APN APN
- the HSS stores the P-GW ID (ie, P-GW address) and associated APN and sends a Notify Response message to the MME.
- IPv Version 6 IPv6
- IPv4 IP Version 4
- Table 2 categorizes PDN types that are substantially generated by IP version capabilities of UEs and networks.
- Table 2 is a table illustrating PDN types and PDN connections.
- the PDN type requested by the UE is IPv4v6 and the PDN types subscribed to the HSS are IPv4 and IPv6, two PDN connections having a single address are established.
- the PDN type requested by the terminal is IPv4v6 and the PDN type subscribed to the HSS is IPv4 or IPv6, one PDN connection having a single address is established.
- the PDN type subscribed to the HSS is IPv4v6, when the PDN type requested by the UE is IPv4 or IPv6, one PDN connection having a single address is established.
- IPv6 backward compatibility with applications that do not support IPv6 is solved, and even if a problem occurs in IPv6 system, it can be used as IPv4.
- the 3GPP standard recommends IP version migration by allowing both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses to be assigned to the same PDN connection.
- the operator may have a burden of operating two pools of IP addresses, which may not be a practical solution.
- PDN APN
- an IPv6 address is allocated to an IMS PDN operated by an operator and an IPv4 address is allocated for backward compatibility with an application that does not support IPv6 in an Internet PDN.
- Combination IP version operation is possible.
- IPv6 operational failure may occur until the initial network operation is stabilized. Accordingly, there is a need for an operation of returning to / falling back to IPv4 which is stable when an IPv6 failure occurs during actual network operation. That is, IP addresses allocated to UEs are different according to IPv4 and IPv6 allocated by P-GW, and falling back to IPv4 means that an IPv4 address is reassigned to a UE.
- IPv6 IPv6 failure
- the operator sequentially falls back the subscriber's IP address to IPv4 to distribute the network load. For example, if you have about 8 million subscribers, it can take hours (eg 3 hours) to reassign all subscribers' IP addresses to IPv4. That is, in the case of randomly reassigning subscribers to IPv4 after an IPv6 failure, a specific terminal may experience service failure for up to 3 hours.
- a service failure may cause a situation where many terminals cannot make or receive calls (for example, call loss), which may significantly affect the service provider. have. Therefore, there is a need for a method capable of providing a service as smoothly as possible, especially in case of an IPv6 failure.
- the present invention proposes a criterion for determining a fall back scheme for each PDN type combination of the PDN and a corresponding operation thereof.
- the present invention largely proposes the following two configurations.
- the HSS checks the PDN connection allocated to the IPv6 among the PDN connections established in the terminal, thereby performing an HSS initiated detach and reattach procedure and an HSS request PDN. Determine whether to proceed with the HSS requested PDN disconnection and reconnection procedure.
- an Internet PDN and an IMS PDN are set.
- IPv4, IPv6, and IPv4v6 addresses can be allocated according to UE and operator capabilities.
- the same IP version may be allocated to the two PDNs or different IP versions may be allocated according to the operator policy.
- the present invention proposes a method of selecting an IPv4 fallback scheme according to the operator PDN IP version assignment in the following form.
- Table 3 is a table illustrating an IP address allocation method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
- the HSS determines which PDN connection is a problem due to an IPv6 failure among PDN connections established to the UE, thereby causing problems for two PDN connections (that is, PDN connection to PDN 1 and PDN 2). If it is determined that the HSS initiated Detach with re-attach (HSS initiated Detach with re-attach) procedure can proceed.
- a negligible or HSS requested PDN disconnection procedure may be performed.
- the terminal must re-establish the PDN connection through the attach procedure. And, during this process, the P-GW must reassign the IP address to the corresponding terminal. If the IPv6 is no longer available when the P-GW is determined, the P-GW reassigns the IPv4. Multimedia communication enables normal communication again through registration.
- the present invention proposes two procedures for falling back to IPv4.
- HSS initiated Detach and Re-attach procedure (hereinafter referred to as' HSS initiated Detach with re-attach) Procedure ') and HSS request PDN disconnection and reconnection procedures (hereinafter referred to as' HSS requested PDN disconnection with HSS request reconnection') for specific PDNs that have an IPv6 failure. collectively referred to as the "with re-connection" procedure.
- the present invention proposes a method of determining which procedure to proceed among the above two procedures by determining which PDN connection is a problem due to an IPv6 failure among PDN connections established to the UE.
- the HSS transmits a Notify Request message during an attach procedure and a PDN connectivity procedure of an IP version according to a PDN for each UE. It can be stored in subscription information through the procedure of. In case of a failure of IPv6 or a specific PDN type, the provider uses this information to sequentially detach the HSS requested PDN disconnection or HSS initiated Detach with re-attach to individual terminals. attach).
- IPv6 cannot be used in a P-GW belonging to a home PLMN (HPLMN). That is, it is assumed that nodes belonging to the HPLMN (MME, HSS, S-GW, P-GW, etc.) by Operation and Maintenance (O & M) already know that they do not use the IPv6 allocated for the specific PDN connection. do.
- the HSS knows a PDN type assigned to the terminal through a Notify Request message or the like.
- FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a method for informing a HSS of a PDN type according to an embodiment of the present invention.
- a recovery operation When a problem is recognized (ie, by operator setting) for a specific PDN type, a recovery operation will be started. For example, the MME may detach and reattach (or PDN disconnect and re-connect) all terminals sequentially. . However, this recovery operation should occur in a range that minimizes the impact on the MME and network load, and it may take a considerable time for PDN type fallback of all subscribers.
- the present invention proposes a method for performing recovery by prioritizing such a terminal in the HSS terminal in order to minimize service interference of voice call transmission and reception while such recovery operation is performed. That is, if the HSS recognizes that the voice call transmission and reception while recognizing that the recovery operation is already in progress, it is necessary to know whether the PDN type fallback of the corresponding UE is required.
- the current MME knows the PDN type actually assigned to the UE.
- the HSS is not known. Therefore, when establishing a PDN connection, the HSS needs to have information on the PDN type allocated to the UE.
- the UE transmits an attach request message or a PDN connectivity request message to an MME, and then attach or UE request PDN connectivity procedure.
- S1301 That is, the procedure according to FIG. 11 and FIG. 12 is performed before (S1302).
- the MME sends active PDN type information (active) assigned to the UE in the Notify Request message. Include and transmit to the HSS (S1303).
- the HSS can know the activated (assigned) PDN type for each PDN connection (or for each PDN (APN)) of the UE.
- Table 4 below shows information in the HSS when the MME informs the HSS of the PDN type set for each PDN through the attach request procedure (see FIG. 11) and the Notify Request procedure of the PDN connection establishment procedure (see FIG. 12). Illustrates an information field.
- the HSS may store an allocated PDN type for each activated PDN connection.
- FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a PDN type fallback method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
- the MME may proceed with the MME initiated Detach with re-attach procedure sequentially involving all terminals having a corresponding PDN connection.
- the MME initiates a Detach with re-attach procedure that sequentially involves re-attachment for terminals allocated to IPv6 for all PDN connections.
- the HSS initiated Detach with the HSS initiated reattachment is preferentially performed for the terminal. proceed with the re-attach procedure.
- the HSS detects (by setting of a network operator (operator)) that IPv6 has failed (S1401).
- the IPv4 fallback procedure may be performed due to the IPv6 failure by the MME.
- the HSS If the HSS recognizes an incoming IMS call to the terminal (terminal A in FIG. 14), the HSS initiated re-attach for IPv4 address assignment is given to the terminal to receive the received call. initiated Detach procedure with Re-attach (S1402), the HSS cancels the location including the identifier (e.g., IMSI) and the cause value (or cancellation type) of the terminal (terminal A).
- the message (Cancel Location) is transmitted to the MME (S1403).
- FIG. 14 only an incoming call to UE A is illustrated, but even when an outgoing call from UE A is generated, a Detach procedure with Re-attach procedure may be performed by prioritizing UE A in the same manner. Can be.
- the HSS may first determine whether the terminal where the transmit / receive call is made is allocated IPv6 for all PDN connections. And, if the UE is assigned IPv6 for all PDN connections, the HSS may proceed with a Detach procedure with Re-attach for the IPv4 fallback of the UE.
- a new cause is proposed so that an HSS initiation detach procedure can be performed to deal with a failure situation such as an IP version change.
- the Cancel Location message is a 'HSS initiated detach' or 'IP' as an identifier (eg IMSI) and cause value (or cancellation type) of the terminal (terminal A).
- the Cancel Location message may include re-attach indication information for indicating a re-attachment of the corresponding terminal.
- the Detach type of the Cancel Location message may be set as a 'Re-attached required'.
- the MME transmits a detach request message to the terminal (S1404).
- the MME may transmit a Detach request message with priority over other terminals for the corresponding terminal.
- the Detach request message includes re-attach indication information.
- a detach type of a detach request message may be set as a 're-attached required'.
- the detach request message may include 'HSS initiated detach' or 'IP version change' or 'PDN type change' as a cause value. can do.
- the terminal may transmit a Detach request (Detach request) message to the terminal.
- Detach request Detach request
- the terminal that receives the Detach request message from the MME deletes the EPS bearer context.
- the MME transmits a Delete Session Request message to the SGW (S1405).
- the Delete Session Request message may include an EPS bearer ID and the like, and the MME deletes EPS bearer context information of the corresponding UE after transmitting a Delete Session Request message.
- the SGW transmits a Delete Session Request message received from the MME to the PGW (S1406).
- the SGW deletes the EPS bearer context information of the terminal after transmitting a Delete Session Request message.
- the PGW transmits a Delete Session Response message to the SGW in response to the Delete Session Request message in step S1406 (S1407).
- the SGW deletes EPS bearer context information of the UE after transmitting a Delete Session Response message.
- the SGW transmits a Delete Session Response message to the MME in response to the Delete Session Request message in step S1405 (S1408).
- the terminal transmits a detach accept message to the MME in response to the detach request message of the step S1404 (S1409).
- the MME may transmit a Cancel Location Answer message to the HSS.
- the Cancel Location Answer message may include an identifier of the terminal (eg, IMSI of the terminal).
- the terminal, the base station, and the MME perform a signaling release procedure (S1410).
- the MME transmits a UE context release command message to the base station to release S1 signaling. If the RRC connection of the terminal is still established, the base station transmits an RRC connection release message to the terminal in order to release the RRC connection, and deletes information associated with the terminal. The base station transmits a UE context release complete message to the MME in response to the UE context release command message.
- the UE Since the Detach request message includes re-attach indication information, the UE immediately performs an attach procedure. That is, the terminal initiates the attach procedure illustrated in FIG. 11.
- an instruction for example, cause or indication
- the attach request message may include a mobile originated progressed, an IP version change, or a PDN type change as the cause value. It may include.
- the attach procedure of the corresponding terminal may be given priority.
- the terminal is assigned an IPv4 address through an attach procedure. That is, since the P-GW already knows that an IPv6 failure occurs, the P-GW allocates an IPv4 address to the corresponding UE. Thereafter, the terminal may successfully process the IMS reception call.
- FIG. 14 briefly illustrates a detach procedure in order to clearly describe the present invention, and another procedure or another node not shown in FIG. 14 may be further added.
- 15 is a diagram illustrating a PDN type fallback method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
- IPv6 failure problem can be solved more simply.
- the MME may proceed with MME requested PDN disconnection with reactivation procedure for all terminals having a connection with the corresponding PDN sequentially with respect to the PDN assigned with IPv6.
- the MME initiates a PDN disconnection with reactivation procedure in which re-activation (or re-connection) is sequentially performed for terminals allocated to IPv6 only for some PDN connections.
- the HSS recognizes a transmission / reception call to a specific terminal (terminal A, in the case of FIG. 15)
- PDN accompanied with the HSS request re-activation (or re-connection) for the terminal Proceed with the HSS requested PDN disconnection with reactivation procedure.
- the HSS detects (by setting of a network operator (operator)) that IPv6 has failed (S1501).
- the IPv4 fallback procedure may be performed due to the IPv6 failure by the MME.
- the HSS If the HSS recognizes an incoming IMS call to the terminal (terminal A in FIG. 15), the HSS requested re-activation for IPv4 address assignment by prioritizing the terminal to receive the received call (HSS requested) Initiate a PDN disconnection with reactivation procedure (S1502), and the HSS requests a Cancel Location message or a PDN disconnect request including an identifier (eg, IMSI) and a PDN identifier (APN) of the corresponding UE (terminal A). The PDN disconnection request message is transmitted to the MME (S1503).
- a PDN disconnection request message is transmitted to the MME (S1503).
- the HSS may first determine whether the terminal where the transmit / receive call is made is allocated IPv6 for all PDN connections. And, if the UE is not assigned IPv6 for all PDN connections (if IPv6 is allocated for some PDN connections), the HSS is a PDN disconnection with re-activation for IPv4 fallback of the UE. with reactivation).
- a new message (for example, a PDN disconnection request message) is defined at the S6a interface between the MME and the HSS as shown in step S1503 of FIG. 15 so that the HSS may request a PDN disconnection from the HSS. .
- the Cancel Location message may include 'Bearer deactivation with reactivation requested' as a cause value (or cancellation type).
- the PDN disconnection request message may include reactivation (or reconnection) indication information.
- a reason for releasing PDN connection of a PDN disconnection request message may be set as a 'Reactivation required'.
- PDN disconnection with re-activation takes precedence over other UEs for the UE.
- the MME transmits a Delete Session Request message to the SGW (S1505).
- the Delete Session Request message may include an EPS bearer ID and the like, and the MME deletes EPS bearer context information of the corresponding UE after transmitting a Delete Session Request message.
- the SGW transmits a Delete Session Request message received from the MME to the PGW (S1506).
- the SGW deletes the EPS bearer context information of the terminal after transmitting a Delete Session Request message.
- the PGW transmits a Delete Session Response message to the SGW in response to the Delete Session Request message in step S1506 (S1507).
- the SGW deletes EPS bearer context information of the UE after transmitting a Delete Session Response message.
- the SGW transmits a Delete Session Response message to the MME in response to the Delete Session Request message in step S1505 (S1508).
- the MME transmits a bearer deactivate bearer request message to the base station in order to request deactivation of all bearers related to the corresponding PDN connection (S1509).
- the Deactivate Bearer Request message may include reactivation (or reconnection) indication information.
- a reason for releasing PDN connection of a Deactivate Bearer Request message may be set as a 'Reactivation required'.
- the base station transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration message to the terminal (S1510).
- the RRC Connection Reconfiguration message may include a Deactivate EPS Bearer Context Request message, which is a NAS message.
- the EPS bearer context deactivation request message may include reactivation (or reconnection) indication information.
- a reason for releasing PDN connection of a Deactivate Bearer Request message may be set as a 'Reactivation required'.
- the terminal transmits an RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete message to the base station, and the terminal releases all radio resources for the corresponding PDN connection (S1511).
- the base station transmits a bearer deactivate bearer response message to the MME in response to the bearer deactivate bearer request message of step S1509 (S1512).
- the direct transfer message of the terminal is transmitted to the base station (S1513).
- the direct transfer message may include a Deactivate EPS Bearer Context Accept message, which is a NAS message.
- the base station transmits an uplink NAS transport message to the MME (S1514).
- the uplink NAS transport message may include a Deactivate EPS Bearer Context Accept message.
- the UE Since the Deactivate EPS Bearer Context Request message previously includes reactivation (or reconnection) indication information, the UE immediately disconnects from the PDN (APN) and PDN connection request procedure (PDN connection request procedure). ). That is, the UE initiates the disconnected PDN (APN) and the UE requested PDN connectivity procedure illustrated in FIG. 12.
- an indication eg, cause or indication
- the PDN Connectivity Request message may include a mobile originated progressed, an IP version change, or a PDN type change as the cause value. It may include.
- the PDN connection procedure of the corresponding UE may be prioritized and processed.
- the terminal is assigned an IPv4 address through an attach procedure. That is, since the P-GW already knows that an IPv6 failure occurs, the P-GW allocates an IPv4 address to the corresponding UE. Thereafter, the terminal may successfully process the IMS reception call.
- the MME belonging to the VPLMN may not know whether a specific PDN type of the HPLMN (Home PLMN) has failed.
- the P-GW of the VPLMN may not be assigned as a valid PDN type that can be operated. In this case, processing is required at the MME stage.
- Detach with Reattach as shown in FIG. 14 or PDN Disconnection with reactivation as shown in FIG. 15 is performed.
- appropriate information may be given to the corresponding UE so that a valid PDN type may be reset (or reassigned).
- the location cancellation (Cancel Location) message in step S1402 of FIG. 14 or the location cancellation (Cancel Location) message / PDN disconnection request message in step S1502 of FIG. 15 includes information on a valid PDN type. can do.
- the information on the valid PDN type may indicate a PDN type in which a current failure occurs and thus the reset is not preferable, or a PDN type capable of normal operation may be indicated.
- the MME when the MME receives a request for detach or PDN disconnection together with information on a valid PDN type, the MME sends information on a valid PDN type (ie, information on a PDN type that can operate normally) to the MME. Can save for a certain time.
- a valid PDN type ie, information on a PDN type that can operate normally
- the MME may be configured to assign a PDN type capable of normal operation of the terminal when the terminal is attached (attach) again or PDN connectivity (PDN Connectivity) reset.
- the MME may be configured to allocate a PDN type capable of normal operation regardless of the PDN type requested by the UE.
- the MME may be used to configure the P-GW and PDN except for an invalid PDN type in the subscribed PDN type value provided from the HSS.
- the MME may select a P-GW supporting an appropriate PDN type. As a result, during the attach procedure or the PDN connectivity procedure by the terminal, the terminal may be connected to the P-GW which allocates a valid PDN type by the MME.
- this proposed method can be used more effectively in roaming situations such as LBO (Local Break Out).
- LBO Local Break Out
- the P-GW does not belong to the HPLMN, only to the VPLMN.
- the P-GW can decide whether to use IPv4 IPv6 with a pool of IP addresses, but in the LBO situation, the P-GW belonging to the VPLMN cannot know whether IPv6 has failed.
- the HSS informs the MME belonging to the VPLMN that the UE should allocate IPv4, and when the UE establishes a PDN connection through the P-GW belonging to the VPLMN, the P-GW allocates an IPv4 address.
- 16 is a diagram illustrating a PDN type fallback method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
- a first PDN type for example, IPv6
- a second PDN type for example, IPv4
- the HSS after detecting an occurrence of a failure of a first PDN type, the HSS preferentially allocates a PDN type allocated for a PDN connection established by the terminal when there is a terminal having voice call transmission and reception. It is determined whether all of them are the first PDN type (S1601).
- the HSS performs a detach with re-attach procedure or disconnection with re-activation depending on whether all PDN types allocated to the PDN connection of the UE are the first PDN type.
- One of the activation procedures is determined (S1602).
- the HSS starts the procedure determined in step S1602 (S1603).
- the HSS may determine a detach with re-attach procedure with the re-attach for the PDN type fallback. In this case, the procedure according to the example of FIG. 14 may be started.
- the HSS is disconnected with re-activation with respect to a specific PDN to which the first PDN type is allocated for the PDN type fallback. -activation) procedure.
- the procedure according to the example of FIG. 15 may be disclosed.
- FIG. 17 illustrates a block diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
- a wireless communication system includes a network node 1710 and a plurality of terminals (UEs) 1720.
- UEs terminals
- the network node 1710 includes a processor 1711, a memory 1712, and a communication module 1713.
- the processor 1711 implements the functions, processes, and / or methods proposed in FIGS. 1 to 16. Layers of the wired / wireless interface protocol may be implemented by the processor 1711.
- the memory 1712 is connected to the processor 1711 and stores various information for driving the processor 1711.
- the communication module 1713 is connected to the processor 1711 and transmits and / or receives a wired / wireless signal.
- a base station, an MME, an HSS, an SGW, a PGW, an application server, and the like may correspond thereto.
- the communication module 1713 may include a radio frequency unit (RF) for transmitting / receiving a radio signal.
- RF radio frequency unit
- the terminal 1720 includes a processor 1721, a memory 1722, and a communication module (or RF unit) 1723.
- the processor 1721 implements the functions, processes, and / or methods proposed in FIGS. 1 to 16. Layers of the air interface protocol may be implemented by the processor 1721.
- the memory 1722 is connected to the processor 1721 and stores various information for driving the processor 1721.
- the communication module 1723 is connected to the processor 1721 to transmit and / or receive a radio signal.
- the memories 1712 and 1722 may be inside or outside the processors 1711 and 1721, and may be connected to the processors 1711 and 1721 by various well-known means.
- the network node 1710 in the case of a base station
- the terminal 1720 may have a single antenna or multiple antennas.
- FIG. 18 illustrates a block diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 18 illustrates the terminal of FIG. 17 in more detail.
- a terminal may include a processor (or a digital signal processor (DSP) 1810, an RF module (or RF unit) 1835, and a power management module 1805). ), Antenna 1840, battery 1855, display 1815, keypad 1820, memory 1830, SIM card (SIM (Subscriber Identification Module) card) 1825 (this configuration is optional), a speaker 1845, and a microphone 1850.
- the terminal may also include a single antenna or multiple antennas. Can be.
- the processor 1810 implements the functions, processes, and / or methods proposed in FIGS. 1 to 16.
- the layer of the air interface protocol may be implemented by the processor 1810.
- the memory 1830 is connected to the processor 1810 and stores information related to the operation of the processor 1810.
- the memory 1830 may be inside or outside the processor 1810 and may be connected to the processor 1810 by various well-known means.
- the user enters command information such as a telephone number, for example, by pressing (or touching) a button on keypad 1820 or by voice activation using microphone 1850.
- the processor 1810 receives the command information, processes the telephone number, and performs a proper function. Operational data may be extracted from the SIM card 1830 or the memory 1830. In addition, the processor 1810 may display command information or driving information on the display 1815 for user recognition and convenience.
- the RF module 1835 is coupled to the processor 1810 to transmit and / or receive RF signals.
- the processor 1810 communicates command information to the RF module 1835 to initiate, for example, a radio signal constituting voice communication data.
- the RF module 1835 is composed of a receiver and a transmitter for receiving and transmitting a radio signal.
- the antenna 1840 functions to transmit and receive wireless signals. Upon receiving the wireless signal, the RF module 1835 may transmit the signal and convert the signal to baseband for processing by the processor 1810. The processed signal may be converted into audible or readable information output through the speaker 1845.
- each component or feature is to be considered optional unless stated otherwise.
- Each component or feature may be embodied in a form that is not combined with other components or features. It is also possible to combine some of the components and / or features to form an embodiment of the invention.
- the order of the operations described in the embodiments of the present invention may be changed. Some components or features of one embodiment may be included in another embodiment or may be replaced with corresponding components or features of another embodiment. It is obvious that the claims may be combined to form an embodiment by combining claims that do not have an explicit citation relationship in the claims or as new claims by post-application correction.
- Embodiments according to the present invention may be implemented by various means, for example, hardware, firmware, software, or a combination thereof.
- an embodiment of the present invention may include one or more application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), digital signal processors (DSPs), digital signal processing devices (DSPDs), programmable logic devices (PLDs), FPGAs ( field programmable gate arrays), processors, controllers, microcontrollers, microprocessors, and the like.
- ASICs application specific integrated circuits
- DSPs digital signal processors
- DSPDs digital signal processing devices
- PLDs programmable logic devices
- FPGAs field programmable gate arrays
- processors controllers, microcontrollers, microprocessors, and the like.
- an embodiment of the present invention may be implemented in the form of a module, procedure, function, etc. that performs the functions or operations described above.
- the software code may be stored in memory and driven by the processor.
- the memory may be located inside or outside the processor, and may exchange data with the processor by various known means.
- the method of performing PDN type fallback in the wireless communication system of the present invention has been described with reference to the example applied to the 3GPP LTE / LTE-A system, but is applicable to various wireless communication systems in addition to the 3GPP LTE / LTE-A system. It is possible.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
Abstract
Description
본 발명은 무선 통신 시스템에 관한 것으로서, 보다 상세하게 장애가 발생된 PDN(Packet Data Network) 타입을 정상 동작이 가능한 PDN 타입으로의 PDN 타입의 폴백(fallback)을 수행하기 위한 또는 지원하기 위한 방법 및 이를 지원하는 장치에 관한 것이다. The present invention relates to a wireless communication system, and more particularly, to a method for performing or supporting a fallback of a PDN type to a PDN type capable of normal operation of a failed PDN type. It is about supporting devices.
이동 통신 시스템은 사용자의 활동성을 보장하면서 음성 서비스를 제공하기 위해 개발되었다. 그러나 이동통신 시스템은 음성뿐 아니라 데이터 서비스까지 영역을 확장하였으며, 현재에는 폭발적인 트래픽의 증가로 인하여 자원의 부족 현상이 야기되고 사용자들이 보다 고속의 서비스에 대한 요구하므로, 보다 발전된 이동 통신 시스템이 요구되고 있다.Mobile communication systems have been developed to provide voice services while ensuring user activity. However, the mobile communication system has expanded not only voice but also data service.As a result of the explosive increase in traffic, a shortage of resources and users are demanding higher speed services, a more advanced mobile communication system is required. have.
차세대 이동 통신 시스템의 요구 조건은 크게 폭발적인 데이터 트래픽의 수용, 사용자 당 전송률의 획기적인 증가, 대폭 증가된 연결 디바이스 개수의 수용, 매우 낮은 단대단 지연(End-to-End Latency), 고에너지 효율을 지원할 수 있어야 한다. 이를 위하여 이중 연결성(Dual Connectivity), 대규모 다중 입출력(Massive MIMO: Massive Multiple Input Multiple Output), 전이중(In-band Full Duplex), 비직교 다중접속(NOMA: Non-Orthogonal Multiple Access), 초광대역(Super wideband) 지원, 단말 네트워킹(Device Networking) 등 다양한 기술들이 연구되고 있다. The requirements of the next generation of mobile communication systems will be able to accommodate the explosive data traffic, dramatically increase the data rate per user, greatly increase the number of connected devices, very low end-to-end latency, and high energy efficiency. It should be possible. Dual connectivity, Massive Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO), In-band Full Duplex, Non-Orthogonal Multiple Access (NOMA), Super Various technologies such as wideband support and device networking have been studied.
본 발명의 목적은 장애가 발생된 PDN 타입을 정상 동작이 가능한 PDN 타입으로 PDN 타입을 폴백(fallback)하기 위한 방법을 제안한다. An object of the present invention is to propose a method for falling back a PDN type from a failed PDN type to a PDN type capable of normal operation.
또한, 본 발명의 목적은 단말에 확립된 PDN 연결에서 할당된 PDN 타입과 장애가 발생된 PDN 타입을 비교함으로써 PDN 타입을 폴백(fallback)하는 절차를 결정하는 방법을 제안한다. It is also an object of the present invention to propose a method for determining a procedure for falling back a PDN type by comparing a PDN type allocated in a PDN connection established to a terminal with a failed PDN type.
또한, 음성 콜 송수신 서비스가 원활하게 서비스되기 위한 PDN 타입의 폴백(fallback) 방법을 제안한다.In addition, a PDN type fallback method for smoothly serving voice call transmission / reception services is proposed.
본 발명에서 이루고자 하는 기술적 과제들은 이상에서 언급한 기술적 과제들로 제한되지 않으며, 언급하지 않은 또 다른 기술적 과제들은 아래의 기재로부터 본 발명이 속하는 기술분야에서 통상의 지식을 가진 자에게 명확하게 이해될 수 있을 것이다.The technical problems to be achieved in the present invention are not limited to the technical problems mentioned above, and other technical problems not mentioned above will be clearly understood by those skilled in the art from the following description. Could be.
본 발명의 일 양상은, 무선 통신 시스템에서 홈 가입 서버(HSS: Home Subscriber Server)가 장애가 발생된 제1 패킷 데이터 네트워크(PDN: Packet Data Network) 타입을 정상 동작이 가능한 제2 PDN 타입으로 폴백(fallback)하기 위한 방법에 있어서, 상기 제1 PDN 타입의 장애 발생을 감지한 후, 음성 콜(voice call) 송수신이 있는 단말이 있는 경우, 우선적으로 상기 단말에 의해 확립된 PDN 연결을 위해 할당된 PDN 타입이 모두 상기 제1 PDN 타입인지 판단하는 단계, 상기 단말의 PDN 연결에 할당된 PDN 타입이 모두 상기 제1 PDN 타입인지 여부에 따라 재-어태치가 수반된 디태치(Detach with re-attach) 절차 또는 재-활성이 수반된 단절(Disconnection with re-activation) 절차 중 어느 하나를 결정하는 단계 및 상기 결정된 절차를 개시하는 단계를 포함할 수 있다. According to an aspect of the present invention, a Home Subscriber Server (HSS) in a wireless communication system falls back to a second PDN type capable of normal operation from a failure of a first Packet Data Network (PDN) type. In the method for fallback, after detecting the occurrence of the failure of the first PDN type, if there is a terminal with voice call (voice call) transmission and reception, PDN allocated for the PDN connection established by the terminal preferentially Determining whether all of the types are the first PDN type, Detach with re-attach procedure with re-attachment depending on whether all the PDN types allocated to the PDN connection of the terminal is the first PDN type Or determining any one of a disconnection with re-activation procedure involving the re-activation and initiating the determined procedure.
본 발명의 다른 일 양상은, 무선 통신 시스템에서 장애가 발생된 제1 패킷 데이터 네트워크(PDN: Packet Data Network) 타입을 정상 동작이 가능한 제2 PDN 타입으로 폴백(fallback)하기 위한 홈 가입 서버(HSS: Home Subscriber Server)에 있어서, 신호를 송수신하기 위한 통신 모듈(communication module) 및 상기 통신 모듈을 제어하는 프로세서를 포함하고, 상기 프로세서는 상기 제1 PDN 타입의 장애 발생을 감지한 후, 음성 콜(voice call) 송수신이 있는 단말이 있는 경우, 우선적으로 상기 단말에 의해 확립된 PDN 연결을 위해 할당된 PDN 타입이 모두 상기 제1 PDN 타입인지 판단하고, 상기 단말의 PDN 연결에 할당된 PDN 타입이 모두 상기 제1 PDN 타입인지 여부에 따라 재-어태치가 수반된 디태치(Detach with re-attach) 절차 또는 재-활성이 수반된 단절(Disconnection with re-activation) 절차 중 어느 하나를 결정하며, 상기 결정된 절차를 개시하도록 구성될 수 있다. According to another aspect of the present invention, a home subscribe server (HSS) for falling back a failed Packet Data Network (PDN) type to a second PDN type capable of normal operation in a wireless communication system (HSS) A Home Subscriber Server, comprising: a communication module for transmitting and receiving signals and a processor for controlling the communication module, wherein the processor detects a failure of the first PDN type and then voices a voice call. call) When there is a terminal having transmission and reception, it is first determined whether all of the PDN types allocated for the PDN connection established by the terminal are the first PDN type, and all of the PDN types assigned to the PDN connection of the terminal are all Depending on whether it is a first PDN type, either a Detach with re-attach procedure or a Disconnection with re-activation procedure. Determine, and may be configured to initiate the determined procedure.
바람직하게, 상기 단말의 PDN 연결에 할당된 PDN 타입이 모두 상기 제1 PDN 타입인 경우, 재-어태치가 수반된 디태치(Detach with re-attach) 절차가 결정될 수 있다.Preferably, when all of the PDN types allocated to the PDN connection of the UE are the first PDN type, a detach with re-attach procedure may be determined.
바람직하게, 원인(cause) 값으로 HSS 개시 디태치(HSS initiated detach) 혹은 IP 버전 변경(IP version change) 혹은 PDN 타입 변경(PDN type change)을 포함하는 위치 취소(Cancel Location) 메시지를 이동성 관리 개체(MME: Mobility Management Entity)에게 전송할 수 있다. Preferably, the mobility management entity sends a Cancel Location message including an HSS initiated detach or an IP version change or a PDN type change as a cause value. (MME: Mobility Management Entity).
바람직하게, 상기 MME는 방문 이동통신 네트워크(VPLMN: Visited Public Land Mobile Network)에 속할 수 있다. Preferably, the MME may belong to a Visited Public Land Mobile Network (VPLMN).
바람직하게, 상기 위치 취소(Cancel Location) 메시지는 장애가 발생된 PDN 타입으로서 상기 제1 PDN 타입을 지시하거나 또는 정상 동작이 가능한 PDN 타입으로서 상기 제2 PDN 타입을 지시할 수 있다. Preferably, the Cancel Location message may indicate the first PDN type as a PDN type in which a failure occurs, or indicate the second PDN type as a PDN type in which normal operation is possible.
바람직하게, 상기 단말에 의한 어태치(Attach) 절차 중에 상기 MME에 의해 상기 단말은 상기 제2 PDN 타입을 할당하는 PDN GW(Packet Data Network Gateway)에 접속될 수 있다.Preferably, during the attach procedure by the terminal, the terminal may be connected to a PDN GW (Packet Data Network Gateway) for allocating the second PDN type by the MME.
바람직하게, 상기 단말의 PDN 연결에 할당된 PDN 타입이 모두 상기 제1 PDN 타입이 아닌 경우, 상기 제1 PDN 타입이 할당된 PDN에 대하여 재-활성이 수반된 단절(Disconnection with re-activation) 절차가 결정될 수 있다. Preferably, when all of the PDN types allocated to the PDN connection of the UE are not the first PDN type, a disconnection with re-activation procedure for the PDN to which the first PDN type is assigned Can be determined.
바람직하게, 원인(cause) 값으로 재-활성 요청이 수반된 베어러 비활성(Bearer deactivation with reactivation requested)을 포함하는 위치 취소(Cancel Location) 메시지 또는 재-활성(reactivation) 지시를 포함하는 PDN 단절 요청(PDN disconnection request) 메시지를 이동성 관리 개체(MME: Mobility Management Entity)에게 전송할 수 있다. Preferably, a PDN disconnect request including a relocation message or a Cancel Location message containing a bearer deactivation with reactivation requested with a cause value ( A PDN disconnection request (PDN) message may be transmitted to a mobility management entity (MME).
바람직하게, 상기 MME는 방문 이동통신 네트워크(VPLMN: Visited Public Land Mobile Network)에 속할 수 있다. Preferably, the MME may belong to a Visited Public Land Mobile Network (VPLMN).
바람직하게, 상기 위치 취소(Cancel Location) 메시지는 장애가 발생된 PDN 타입으로서 상기 제1 PDN 타입을 지시하거나 또는 정상 동작이 가능한 PDN 타입으로서 상기 제2 PDN 타입을 지시할 수 있다. Preferably, the Cancel Location message may indicate the first PDN type as a PDN type in which a failure occurs, or indicate the second PDN type as a PDN type in which normal operation is possible.
바람직하게, 상기 단말에 의한 PDN 연결(PDN Connectivity) 절차 중에 상기 MME에 의해 상기 단말은 상기 제2 PDN 타입을 할당하는 PDN GW(Packet Data Network Gateway)에 접속될 수 있다. Preferably, the terminal may be connected to a PDN Packet Data Network Gateway (GW) that allocates the second PDN type by the MME during a PDN connectivity procedure by the terminal.
본 발명의 실시예에 따르면, 장애가 발생된 PDN 타입을 정상 동작이 가능한 PDN 타입으로 PDN 타입을 폴백(fallback)함으로써 원활하게 이동 통신 서비스가 가능하다. According to an embodiment of the present invention, the mobile communication service can be smoothly performed by falling back the PDN type to the PDN type capable of normal operation from the failed PDN type.
또한, 본 발명의 실시예에 따르면, 단말에 적합한 PDN 타입을 폴백(fallback)하는 절차를 결정함으로써 보다 효율적으로 PDN 타입 폴백 절차를 진행할 수 있다. In addition, according to an embodiment of the present invention, the PDN type fallback procedure may be more efficiently performed by determining a procedure of falling back a PDN type suitable for a terminal.
또한, 음성 콜이 발생된 단말을 우선적으로 폴백 시킴으로써 음성 콜 송수신 서비스가 원활하게 제공될 수 있다. In addition, the voice call transmission and reception service may be smoothly provided by first falling back the terminal where the voice call is generated.
본 발명에서 얻을 수 있는 효과는 이상에서 언급한 효과로 제한되지 않으며, 언급하지 않은 또 다른 효과들은 아래의 기재로부터 본 발명이 속하는 기술분야에서 통상의 지식을 가진 자에게 명확하게 이해될 수 있을 것이다.The effects obtainable in the present invention are not limited to the above-mentioned effects, and other effects not mentioned will be clearly understood by those skilled in the art from the following description. .
본 발명에 관한 이해를 돕기 위해 상세한 설명의 일부로 포함되는, 첨부 도면은 본 발명에 대한 실시예를 제공하고, 상세한 설명과 함께 본 발명의 기술적 특징을 설명한다.BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS The accompanying drawings, included as part of the detailed description in order to provide a thorough understanding of the present invention, provide embodiments of the present invention and together with the description, describe the technical features of the present invention.
도 1은 본 발명이 적용될 수 있는 EPS(Evolved Packet System)을 간략히 예시하는 도면이다. 1 is a view briefly illustrating an EPS (Evolved Packet System) to which the present invention can be applied.
도 2는 본 발명이 적용될 수 있는 E-UTRAN(evolved universal terrestrial radio access network)의 네트워크 구조의 일 예를 나타낸다.2 shows an example of a network structure of an evolved universal terrestrial radio access network (E-UTRAN) to which the present invention can be applied.
도 3은 본 발명이 적용될 수 있는 무선 통신 시스템에서 E-UTRAN 및 EPC의 구조를 예시한다. 3 illustrates the structure of an E-UTRAN and an EPC in a wireless communication system to which the present invention can be applied.
도 4는 본 발명이 적용될 수 있는 무선 통신 시스템에서 단말과 E-UTRAN 사이의 무선 인터페이스 프로토콜(radio interface protocol) 구조를 나타낸다. 4 shows a structure of a radio interface protocol between a terminal and an E-UTRAN in a wireless communication system to which the present invention can be applied.
도 5는 본 발명이 적용될 수 있는 무선 통신 시스템에서 S1 인터페이스 프로토콜 구조를 나타낸다.5 shows an S1 interface protocol structure in a wireless communication system to which the present invention can be applied.
도 6은 본 발명이 적용될 수 있는 무선 통신 시스템에서 물리 채널의 구조를 간략히 예시하는 도면이다. 6 is a diagram exemplarily illustrating a structure of a physical channel in a wireless communication system to which the present invention can be applied.
도 7은 본 발명이 적용될 수 있는 무선 통신 시스템에서 EMM 및 ECM 상태를 예시하는 도면이다. 7 is a diagram illustrating EMM and ECM states in a wireless communication system to which the present invention can be applied.
도 8은 본 발명이 적용될 수 있는 무선 통신 시스템에서 베어러 구조를 예시한다. 8 illustrates a bearer structure in a wireless communication system to which the present invention can be applied.
도 9는 본 발명의 적용될 수 있는 무선 통신 시스템에서 EMM 등록 상태에서 제어 평면(control plane) 및 사용자 평면(user plane)의 전송 경로를 예시하는 도면이다. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a transmission path of a control plane and a user plane in an EMM registered state in a wireless communication system to which the present invention can be applied.
도 10은 본 발명이 적용될 수 있는 무선 통신 시스템에서 경쟁 기반 랜덤 액세스 절차를 설명하기 위한 도면이다.10 is a diagram for explaining a contention based random access procedure in a wireless communication system to which the present invention can be applied.
도 11은 본 발명이 적용될 수 있는 무선 통신 시스템에서 어태치(Attach) 절차를 간략히 예시하는 도면이다. 11 is a diagram briefly illustrating an attach procedure in a wireless communication system to which the present invention may be applied.
도 12는 본 발명이 적용될 수 있는 무선 통신 시스템에서 단말 요청 PDN 연결 절차(UE requested PDN connectivity procedure)를 예시하는 도면이다. 12 is a diagram illustrating a UE requested PDN connectivity procedure in a wireless communication system to which the present invention can be applied.
도 13은 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따른 HSS에게 PDN 타입을 알려주기 위한 방법을 예시하는 도면이다. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a method for informing a HSS of a PDN type according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG.
도 14는 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따른 PDN 타입 폴백 방법을 예시하는 도면이다. 14 is a diagram illustrating a PDN type fallback method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
도 15는 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따른 PDN 타입 폴백 방법을 예시하는 도면이다.15 is a diagram illustrating a PDN type fallback method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
도 16은 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따른 PDN 타입 폴백 방법을 예시하는 도면이다. 16 is a diagram illustrating a PDN type fallback method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
도 17 및 도 18은 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따른 통신 장치의 블록 구성도를 예시한다.17 and 18 illustrate a block diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
이하, 본 발명에 따른 바람직한 실시 형태를 첨부된 도면을 참조하여 상세하게 설명한다. 첨부된 도면과 함께 이하에 개시될 상세한 설명은 본 발명의 예시적인 실시형태를 설명하고자 하는 것이며, 본 발명이 실시될 수 있는 유일한 실시형태를 나타내고자 하는 것이 아니다. 이하의 상세한 설명은 본 발명의 완전한 이해를 제공하기 위해서 구체적 세부사항을 포함한다. 그러나, 당업자는 본 발명이 이러한 구체적 세부사항 없이도 실시될 수 있음을 안다. Hereinafter, exemplary embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings. The detailed description, which will be given below with reference to the accompanying drawings, is intended to explain exemplary embodiments of the present invention and is not intended to represent the only embodiments in which the invention may be practiced. The following detailed description includes specific details in order to provide a thorough understanding of the present invention. However, one of ordinary skill in the art appreciates that the present invention may be practiced without these specific details.
몇몇 경우, 본 발명의 개념이 모호해지는 것을 피하기 위하여 공지의 구조 및 장치는 생략되거나, 각 구조 및 장치의 핵심기능을 중심으로 한 블록도 형식으로 도시될 수 있다. In some instances, well-known structures and devices may be omitted or shown in block diagram form centering on the core functions of the structures and devices in order to avoid obscuring the concepts of the present invention.
본 명세서에서 기지국은 단말과 직접적으로 통신을 수행하는 네트워크의 종단 노드(terminal node)로서의 의미를 갖는다. 본 문서에서 기지국에 의해 수행되는 것으로 설명된 특정 동작은 경우에 따라서는 기지국의 상위 노드(upper node)에 의해 수행될 수도 있다. 즉, 기지국을 포함하는 다수의 네트워크 노드들(network nodes)로 이루어지는 네트워크에서 단말과의 통신을 위해 수행되는 다양한 동작들은 기지국 또는 기지국 이외의 다른 네트워크 노드들에 의해 수행될 수 있음은 자명하다. '기지국(BS: Base Station)'은 고정국(fixed station), Node B, eNB(evolved-NodeB), BTS(base transceiver system), 액세스 포인트(AP: Access Point) 등의 용어에 의해 대체될 수 있다. 또한, '단말(Terminal)'은 고정되거나 이동성을 가질 수 있으며, UE(User Equipment), MS(Mobile Station), UT(user terminal), MSS(Mobile Subscriber Station), SS(Subscriber Station), AMS(Advanced Mobile Station), WT(Wireless terminal), MTC(Machine-Type Communication) 장치, M2M(Machine-to-Machine) 장치, D2D(Device-to-Device) 장치 등의 용어로 대체될 수 있다.In this specification, a base station has a meaning as a terminal node of a network that directly communicates with a terminal. The specific operation described as performed by the base station in this document may be performed by an upper node of the base station in some cases. That is, it is obvious that various operations performed for communication with a terminal in a network composed of a plurality of network nodes including a base station may be performed by the base station or other network nodes other than the base station. A 'base station (BS)' may be replaced by terms such as a fixed station, a Node B, an evolved-NodeB (eNB), a base transceiver system (BTS), an access point (AP), and the like. . In addition, a 'terminal' may be fixed or mobile, and may include a user equipment (UE), a mobile station (MS), a user terminal (UT), a mobile subscriber station (MSS), a subscriber station (SS), and an AMS ( Advanced Mobile Station (WT), Wireless Terminal (WT), Machine-Type Communication (MTC) Device, Machine-to-Machine (M2M) Device, Device-to-Device (D2D) Device, etc.
이하에서, 하향링크(DL: downlink)는 기지국에서 단말로의 통신을 의미하며, 상향링크(UL: uplink)는 단말에서 기지국으로의 통신을 의미한다. 하향링크에서 송신기는 기지국의 일부이고, 수신기는 단말의 일부일 수 있다. 상향링크에서 송신기는 단말의 일부이고, 수신기는 기지국의 일부일 수 있다.Hereinafter, downlink (DL) means communication from a base station to a terminal, and uplink (UL) means communication from a terminal to a base station. In downlink, a transmitter may be part of a base station, and a receiver may be part of a terminal. In uplink, a transmitter may be part of a terminal and a receiver may be part of a base station.
이하의 설명에서 사용되는 특정 용어들은 본 발명의 이해를 돕기 위해서 제공된 것이며, 이러한 특정 용어의 사용은 본 발명의 기술적 사상을 벗어나지 않는 범위에서 다른 형태로 변경될 수 있다.Specific terms used in the following description are provided to help the understanding of the present invention, and the use of such specific terms may be changed to other forms without departing from the technical spirit of the present invention.
이하의 기술은 CDMA(code division multiple access), FDMA(frequency division multiple access), TDMA(time division multiple access), OFDMA(orthogonal frequency division multiple access), SC-FDMA(single carrier frequency division multiple access), NOMA(non-orthogonal multiple access) 등과 같은 다양한 무선 접속 시스템에 이용될 수 있다. CDMA는 UTRA(universal terrestrial radio access)나 CDMA2000과 같은 무선 기술(radio technology)로 구현될 수 있다. TDMA는 GSM(global system for mobile communications)/GPRS(general packet radio service)/EDGE(enhanced data rates for GSM evolution)와 같은 무선 기술로 구현될 수 있다. OFDMA는 IEEE 802.11 (Wi-Fi), IEEE 802.16 (WiMAX), IEEE 802-20, E-UTRA(evolved UTRA) 등과 같은 무선 기술로 구현될 수 있다. UTRA는 UMTS(universal mobile telecommunications system)의 일부이다. 3GPP(3rd generation partnership project) LTE(long term evolution)은 E-UTRA를 사용하는 E-UMTS(evolved UMTS)의 일부로써, 하향링크에서 OFDMA를 채용하고 상향링크에서 SC-FDMA를 채용한다. LTE-A(advanced)는 3GPP LTE의 진화이다.The following techniques are code division multiple access (CDMA), frequency division multiple access (FDMA), time division multiple access (TDMA), orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDMA), single carrier frequency division multiple access (SC-FDMA), and NOMA It can be used in various radio access systems such as non-orthogonal multiple access. CDMA may be implemented by a radio technology such as universal terrestrial radio access (UTRA) or CDMA2000. TDMA may be implemented with wireless technologies such as global system for mobile communications (GSM) / general packet radio service (GPRS) / enhanced data rates for GSM evolution (EDGE). OFDMA may be implemented in a wireless technology such as IEEE 802.11 (Wi-Fi), IEEE 802.16 (WiMAX), IEEE 802-20, evolved UTRA (E-UTRA). UTRA is part of a universal mobile telecommunications system (UMTS). 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP) long term evolution (LTE) is a part of evolved UMTS (E-UMTS) using E-UTRA, and employs OFDMA in downlink and SC-FDMA in uplink. LTE-A (advanced) is the evolution of 3GPP LTE.
본 발명의 실시예들은 무선 접속 시스템들인 IEEE 802, 3GPP 및 3GPP2 중 적어도 하나에 개시된 표준 문서들에 의해 뒷받침될 수 있다. 즉, 본 발명의 실시예들 중 본 발명의 기술적 사상을 명확히 드러내기 위해 설명하지 않은 단계들 또는 부분들은 상기 문서들에 의해 뒷받침될 수 있다. 또한, 본 문서에서 개시하고 있는 모든 용어들은 상기 표준 문서에 의해 설명될 수 있다.Embodiments of the present invention may be supported by standard documents disclosed in at least one of the wireless access systems IEEE 802, 3GPP and 3GPP2. That is, steps or parts which are not described to clearly reveal the technical spirit of the present invention among the embodiments of the present invention may be supported by the above documents. In addition, all terms disclosed in the present document can be described by the above standard document.
설명을 명확하게 하기 위해, 3GPP LTE/LTE-A를 위주로 기술하지만 본 발명의 기술적 특징이 이에 제한되는 것은 아니다.For clarity, the following description focuses on 3GPP LTE / LTE-A, but the technical features of the present invention are not limited thereto.
본 문서에서 사용될 수 있는 용어들은 다음과 같이 정의된다. Terms that can be used in this document are defined as follows.
- UMTS(Universal Mobile Telecommunications System): 3GPP에 의해서 개발된, GSM(Global System for Mobile Communication) 기반의 3 세대(Generation) 이동 통신 기술UMTS (Universal Mobile Telecommunications System): A third generation mobile communication technology based on Global System for Mobile Communication (GSM) developed by 3GPP
- EPS(Evolved Packet System): IP(Internet Protocol) 기반의 패킷 교환(packet switched) 코어 네트워크인 EPC(Evolved Packet Core)와 LTE, UTRAN 등의 액세스 네트워크로 구성된 네트워크 시스템. UMTS가 진화된 형태의 네트워크이다. Evolved Packet System (EPS): A network system consisting of an Evolved Packet Core (EPC), which is a packet switched core network based on Internet Protocol (IP), and an access network such as LTE and UTRAN. UMTS is an evolutionary network.
- NodeB: UMTS 네트워크의 기지국. 옥외에 설치하며 커버리지는 매크로 셀(macro cell) 규모이다. NodeB: base station of UMTS network. It is installed outdoors and its coverage is macro cell size.
- eNodeB: EPS 네트워크의 기지국. 옥외에 설치하며 커버리지는 매크로 셀(macro cell) 규모이다. eNodeB: base station of EPS network. It is installed outdoors and its coverage is macro cell size.
- 단말(User Equipment): 사용자 기기. 단말은 단말(terminal), ME(Mobile Equipment), MS(Mobile Station) 등의 용어로 언급될 수 있다. 또한, 단말은 노트북, 휴대폰, PDA(Personal Digital Assistant), 스마트폰, 멀티미디어 기기 등과 같이 휴대 가능한 기기일 수 있고, 또는 PC(Personal Computer), 차량 탑재 장치와 같이 휴대 불가능한 기기일 수도 있다. MTC 관련 내용에서 단말 또는 단말이라는 용어는 MTC 단말을 지칭할 수 있다. User Equipment: User Equipment. A terminal may be referred to in terms of terminal, mobile equipment (ME), mobile station (MS), and the like. In addition, the terminal may be a portable device such as a laptop, a mobile phone, a personal digital assistant (PDA), a smartphone, a multimedia device, or the like, or may be a non-portable device such as a personal computer (PC) or a vehicle-mounted device. The term "terminal" or "terminal" in the MTC related content may refer to an MTC terminal.
- IMS(IP Multimedia Subsystem): 멀티미디어 서비스를 IP 기반으로 제공하는 서브시스템.IMS (IP Multimedia Subsystem): A subsystem for providing multimedia services based on IP.
- IMSI(International Mobile Subscriber Identity): 이동 통신 네트워크에서 국제적으로 고유하게 할당되는 사용자 식별자.International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI): An internationally uniquely assigned user identifier in a mobile communications network.
- MTC(Machine Type Communication): 사람의 개입 없이 머신에 의해 수행되는 통신. M2M(Machine to Machine) 통신이라고 지칭할 수도 있다.Machine Type Communication (MTC): Communication performed by a machine without human intervention. It may also be referred to as M2M (Machine to Machine) communication.
- MTC 단말(MTC UE 또는 MTC device 또는 MTC 장치): 이동 통신 네트워크를 통한 통신 기능을 가지고, MTC 기능을 수행하는 단말(예를 들어, 자판기, 검침기 등).MTC terminal (MTC UE or MTC device or MTC device): a terminal having a communication function through a mobile communication network and performing an MTC function (for example, a vending machine, a meter reading device, etc.).
- MTC 서버(MTC server): MTC 단말을 관리하는 네트워크 상의 서버. 이동 통신 네트워크의 내부 또는 외부에 존재할 수 있다. MTC 사용자가 접근(access)할 수 있는 인터페이스를 가질 수 있다. 또한, MTC 서버는 다른 서버들에게 MTC 관련 서비스를 제공할 수도 있고(SCS(Services Capability Server) 형태), 자신이 MTC 어플리케이션 서버일 수도 있다. MTC server: A server on a network that manages an MTC terminal. It may exist inside or outside the mobile communication network. It may have an interface that an MTC user can access. In addition, the MTC server may provide MTC related services to other servers (Services Capability Server (SCS)), or the MTC server may be an MTC application server.
- (MTC) 어플리케이션(application): (MTC가 적용되는) 서비스(예를 들어, 원격 검침, 물량 이동 추적, 기상 관측 센서 등)(MTC) application: services (e.g., remote meter reading, volume movement tracking, weather sensors, etc.)
- (MTC) 어플리케이션 서버: (MTC) 어플리케이션이 실행되는 네트워크 상의 서버(MTC) application server: a server on a network where (MTC) applications run
- MTC 특징(MTC feature): MTC 어플리케이션을 지원하기 위한 네트워크의 기능. 예를 들어, MTC 모니터링(monitoring)은 원격 검침 등의 MTC 어플리케이션에서 장비 분실 등을 대비하기 위한 특징이고, 낮은 이동성(low mobility)은 자판기와 같은 MTC 단말에 대한 MTC 어플리케이션을 위한 특징이다. MTC feature: A function of a network to support an MTC application. For example, MTC monitoring is a feature for preparing for loss of equipment in an MTC application such as a remote meter reading, and low mobility is a feature for an MTC application for an MTC terminal such as a vending machine.
- MTC 가입자(MTC subscriber): 네트워크 오퍼레이터와 접속 관계를 가지고 있으며, 하나 이상의 MTC 단말에게 서비스를 제공하는 엔티티(entity)이다. MTC subscriber: An entity having a connection relationship with a network operator and providing a service to one or more MTC terminals.
- MTC 그룹(MTC group): 적어도 하나 이상의 MTC 특징을 공유하며, MTC 가입자에 속한 MTC 단말의 그룹을 의미한다. MTC group: A group of MTC terminals that share at least one MTC feature and belongs to an MTC subscriber.
- 서비스 역량 서버(SCS: Services Capability Server): HPLMN(Home PLMN) 상의 MTC-IWF(MTC InterWorking Function) 및 MTC 단말과 통신하기 위한 엔티티로서, 3GPP 네트워크와 접속되어 있다. Services Capability Server (SCS): An entity for communicating with an MTC InterWorking Function (MTC-IWF) and an MTC terminal on a Home PLMN (HPLMN), which is connected to a 3GPP network.
- 외부 식별자(External Identifier): 3GPP 네트워크의 외부 엔티티(예를 들어, SCS 또는 어플리케이션 서버)가 MTC 단말(또는 MTC 단말이 속한 가입자)을 가리키기(또는 식별하기) 위해 사용하는 식별자(identifier)로서 전세계적으로 고유(globally unique)하다. 외부 식별자는 다음과 같이 도메인 식별자(Domain Identifier)와 로컬 식별자(Local Identifier)로 구성된다. External Identifier: An identifier used by an external entity (e.g., an SCS or application server) of a 3GPP network to point to (or identify) an MTC terminal (or a subscriber to which the MTC terminal belongs). Globally unique. The external identifier is composed of a domain identifier and a local identifier as follows.
- 도메인 식별자(Domain Identifier): 이동 통신 네트워크 사업자의 제어 항에 있는 도메인을 식별하기 위한 식별자. 하나의 사업자는 서로 다른 서비스로의 접속을 제공하기 위해 서비스 별로 도메인 식별자를 사용할 수 있다. Domain Identifier: An identifier for identifying a domain in a control term of a mobile communication network operator. One provider may use a domain identifier for each service to provide access to different services.
- 로컬 식별자(Local Identifier): IMSI(International Mobile Subscriber Identity)를 유추하거나 획득하는데 사용되는 식별자. 로컬 식별자는 어플리케이션 도메인 내에서는 고유(unique)해야 하며, 이동 통신 네트워크 사업자에 의해 관리된다. Local Identifier: An identifier used to infer or obtain an International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI). Local identifiers must be unique within the application domain and are managed by the mobile telecommunications network operator.
- RAN(Radio Access Network): 3GPP 네트워크에서 Node B 및 이를 제어하는 RNC(Radio Network Controller), eNodeB를 포함하는 단위. 단말 단에 존재하며 코어 네트워크로의 연결을 제공한다. RAN (Radio Access Network): a unit including a Node B, a Radio Network Controller (RNC), and an eNodeB controlling the Node B in a 3GPP network. It exists at the terminal end and provides connection to the core network.
- HLR(Home Location Register)/HSS(Home Subscriber Server): 3GPP 네트워크 내의 가입자 정보를 가지고 있는 데이터베이스. HSS는 설정 저장(configuration storage), 식별자 관리(identity management), 사용자 상태 저장 등의 기능을 수행할 수 있다. Home Location Register (HLR) / Home Subscriber Server (HSS): A database containing subscriber information in the 3GPP network. The HSS may perform functions such as configuration storage, identity management, and user state storage.
- RANAP(RAN Application Part): RAN과 코어 네트워크의 제어를 담당하는 노드(즉, MME(Mobility Management Entity)/SGSN(Serving GPRS(General Packet Radio Service) Supporting Node)/MSC(Mobile Switching Center)) 사이의 인터페이스.RANAP (RAN Application Part): between the RAN and the node in charge of controlling the core network (ie, Mobility Management Entity (MME) / Serving General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) Supporting Node) / MSC (Mobile Switching Center) Interface.
- PLMN(Public Land Mobile Network): 개인들에게 이동 통신 서비스를 제공할 목적으로 구성된 네트워크. 오퍼레이터 별로 구분되어 구성될 수 있다. Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN): A network composed for the purpose of providing mobile communication services to individuals. It may be configured separately for each operator.
- NAS(Non-Access Stratum): UMTS, EPS 프로토콜 스택에서 단말과 코어 네트워크 간의 시그널링, 트래픽 메시지를 주고 받기 위한 기능적인 계층. 단말의 이동성을 지원하고, 단말과 PDN GW 간의 IP 연결을 수립 및 유지하는 세션 관리 절차를 지원하는 것을 주된 기능으로 한다.Non-Access Stratum (NAS): A functional layer for transmitting and receiving signaling and traffic messages between a terminal and a core network in a UMTS and EPS protocol stack. The main function is to support the mobility of the terminal and to support the session management procedure for establishing and maintaining an IP connection between the terminal and the PDN GW.
이하, 위와 같이 정의된 용어를 바탕으로 본 발명에 대하여 기술한다. Hereinafter, the present invention will be described based on the terms defined above.
본 발명이 적용될 수 있는 시스템 일반General system to which the present invention can be applied
도 1은 본 발명이 적용될 수 있는 EPS (Evolved Packet System)을 간략히 예시하는 도면이다.1 is a diagram briefly illustrating an EPS (Evolved Packet System) to which the present invention may be applied.
도 1의 네트워크 구조도는 EPC(Evolved Packet Core)를 포함하는 EPS(Evolved Packet System)의 구조를 이를 간략하게 재구성 한 것이다. The network structure diagram of FIG. 1 briefly reconstructs a structure of an EPS (Evolved Packet System) including an Evolved Packet Core (EPC).
EPC(Evolved Packet Core)는 3GPP 기술들의 성능을 향상하기 위한 SAE(System Architecture Evolution)의 핵심적인 요소이다. SAE는 다양한 종류의 네트워크 간의 이동성을 지원하는 네트워크 구조를 결정하는 연구 과제에 해당한다. SAE는, 예를 들어, IP 기반으로 다양한 무선 접속 기술들을 지원하고 보다 향상된 데이터 전송 능력을 제공하는 등의 최적화된 패킷-기반 시스템을 제공하는 것을 목표로 한다.Evolved Packet Core (EPC) is a key element of System Architecture Evolution (SAE) to improve the performance of 3GPP technologies. SAE is a research project to determine network structure supporting mobility between various kinds of networks. SAE aims to provide an optimized packet-based system, for example, supporting various radio access technologies on an IP basis and providing improved data transfer capability.
구체적으로, EPC는 3GPP LTE 시스템을 위한 IP 이동 통신 시스템의 코어 네트워크(Core Network)이며, 패킷-기반 실시간 및 비실시간 서비스를 지원할 수 있다. 기존의 이동 통신 시스템(즉, 2 세대 또는 3 세대 이동 통신 시스템)에서는 음성을 위한 CS(Circuit-Switched) 및 데이터를 위한 PS(Packet-Switched)의 2 개의 구별되는 서브-도메인을 통해서 코어 네트워크의 기능이 구현되었다. 그러나, 3 세대 이동 통신 시스템의 진화인 3GPP LTE 시스템에서는, CS 및 PS의 서브-도메인들이 하나의 IP 도메인으로 단일화되었다. 즉, 3GPP LTE 시스템에서는, IP 능력(capability)을 가지는 단말과 단말 간의 연결이, IP 기반의 기지국(예를 들어, eNodeB(evolved Node B)), EPC, 애플리케이션 도메인(예를 들어, IMS)을 통하여 구성될 수 있다. 즉, EPC는 단-대-단(end-to-end) IP 서비스 구현에 필수적인 구조이다.Specifically, the EPC is a core network of an IP mobile communication system for a 3GPP LTE system and may support packet-based real-time and non-real-time services. In a conventional mobile communication system (i.e., a second generation or third generation mobile communication system), the core network is divided into two distinct sub-domains of circuit-switched (CS) for voice and packet-switched (PS) for data. The function has been implemented. However, in the 3GPP LTE system, an evolution of the third generation mobile communication system, the sub-domains of CS and PS have been unified into one IP domain. That is, in the 3GPP LTE system, the connection between the terminal and the terminal having the IP capability (capability), the IP-based base station (for example, eNodeB (evolved Node B)), EPC, application domain (for example, IMS) It can be configured through. That is, EPC is an essential structure for implementing end-to-end IP service.
EPC는 다양한 구성요소들을 포함할 수 있으며, 도 1에서는 그 중에서 일부에 해당하는, SGW(Serving Gateway)(또는 S-GW), PDN GW(Packet Data Network Gateway)(또는 PGW 또는 P-GW), MME(Mobility Management Entity), SGSN(Serving GPRS(General Packet Radio Service) Supporting Node), ePDG(enhanced Packet Data Gateway)를 도시한다.The EPC may include various components, and in FIG. 1, some of them correspond to a Serving Gateway (SGW) (or S-GW), PDN GW (Packet Data Network Gateway) (or PGW or P-GW), A mobility management entity (MME), a Serving General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) Supporting Node (SGSN), and an enhanced Packet Data Gateway (ePDG) are shown.
SGW는 무선 접속 네트워크(RAN)와 코어 네트워크 사이의 경계점으로서 동작하고, eNodeB와 PDN GW 사이의 데이터 경로를 유지하는 기능을 하는 요소이다. 또한, 단말이 eNodeB에 의해서 서빙(serving)되는 영역에 걸쳐 이동하는 경우, SGW는 로컬 이동성 앵커 포인트(anchor point)의 역할을 한다. 즉, E-UTRAN (3GPP 릴리즈-8 이후에서 정의되는 Evolved-UMTS(Universal Mobile Telecommunications System) Terrestrial Radio Access Network) 내에서의 이동성을 위해서 SGW를 통해서 패킷들이 라우팅될 수 있다. 또한, SGW는 다른 3GPP 네트워크(3GPP 릴리즈-8 전에 정의되는 RAN, 예를 들어, UTRAN 또는 GERAN(GSM(Global System for Mobile Communication)/EDGE(Enhanced Data rates for Global Evolution) Radio Access Network)와의 이동성을 위한 앵커 포인트로서 기능할 수도 있다.The SGW acts as a boundary point between the radio access network (RAN) and the core network, and is an element that functions to maintain a data path between the eNodeB and the PDN GW. In addition, when the UE moves over the area served by the eNodeB, the SGW serves as a local mobility anchor point. That is, packets may be routed through the SGW for mobility in the E-UTRAN (Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (Evolved-UMTS) Terrestrial Radio Access Network defined in 3GPP Release-8 or later). SGW also provides mobility with other 3GPP networks (RANs defined before 3GPP Release-8, such as UTRAN or GERAN (Global System for Mobile Communication (GSM) / Enhanced Data rates for Global Evolution (EDGE) Radio Access Network). It can also function as an anchor point.
PDN GW는 패킷 데이터 네트워크를 향한 데이터 인터페이스의 종단점(termination point)에 해당한다. PDN GW는 정책 집행 특징(policy enforcement features), 패킷 필터링(packet filtering), 과금 지원(charging support) 등을 지원할 수 있다. 또한, 3GPP 네트워크와 비-3GPP(non-3GPP) 네트워크 (예를 들어, I-WLAN(Interworking Wireless Local Area Network)과 같은 신뢰되지 않는 네트워크, CDMA(Code Division Multiple Access) 네트워크나 Wimax와 같은 신뢰되는 네트워크)와의 이동성 관리를 위한 앵커 포인트 역할을 할 수 있다.The PDN GW corresponds to the termination point of the data interface towards the packet data network. The PDN GW may support policy enforcement features, packet filtering, charging support, and the like. Also, untrusted networks such as 3GPP networks and non-3GPP networks (e.g., Interworking Wireless Local Area Networks (I-WLANs), trusted divisions such as Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) networks or Wimax). It can serve as an anchor point for mobility management with the network.
도 1의 네트워크 구조의 예시에서는 SGW와 PDN GW가 별도의 게이트웨이로 구성되는 것을 나타내지만, 두 개의 게이트웨이가 단일 게이트웨이 구성 옵션(Single Gateway Configuration Option)에 따라 구현될 수도 있다.Although the example of the network structure of FIG. 1 shows that the SGW and the PDN GW are configured as separate gateways, two gateways may be implemented according to a single gateway configuration option.
MME는, 단말의 네트워크 연결에 대한 액세스, 네트워크 자원의 할당, 트래킹(tracking), 페이징(paging), 로밍(roaming) 및 핸드오버 등을 지원하기 위한 시그널링 및 제어 기능들을 수행하는 요소이다. MME는 가입자 및 세션 관리에 관련된 제어 평면 기능들을 제어한다. MME는 수많은 eNodeB들을 관리하고, 다른 2G/3G 네트워크에 대한 핸드오버를 위한 종래의 게이트웨이의 선택을 위한 시그널링을 수행한다. 또한, MME는 보안 과정(Security Procedures), 단말-대-네트워크 세션 핸들링(Terminal-to-network Session Handling), 유휴 단말 위치결정 관리(Idle Terminal Location Management) 등의 기능을 수행한다.The MME is an element that performs signaling and control functions for supporting access to a network connection, allocation of network resources, tracking, paging, roaming, handover, and the like. The MME controls the control plane functions related to subscriber and session management. The MME manages a number of eNodeBs and performs signaling for the selection of a conventional gateway for handover to other 2G / 3G networks. The MME also performs functions such as security procedures, terminal-to-network session handling, and idle terminal location management.
SGSN은 다른 3GPP 네트워크(예를 들어, GPRS 네트워크)에 대한 사용자의 이동성 관리 및 인증(authentication)과 같은 모든 패킷 데이터를 핸들링한다.SGSN handles all packet data, such as user's mobility management and authentication to other 3GPP networks (eg GPRS networks).
ePDG는 신뢰되지 않는 비-3GPP 네트워크(예를 들어, I-WLAN, WiFi 핫스팟(hotspot) 등)에 대한 보안 노드로서의 역할을 한다. The ePDG acts as a secure node for untrusted non-3GPP networks (eg, I-WLAN, WiFi hotspots, etc.).
도 1을 참조하여 설명한 바와 같이, IP 능력을 가지는 단말은, 3GPP 액세스는 물론 비-3GPP 액세스 기반으로도 EPC 내의 다양한 요소들을 경유하여 사업자(즉, 오퍼레이터(operator))가 제공하는 IP 서비스 네트워크(예를 들어, IMS)에 액세스할 수 있다.As described with reference to FIG. 1, a terminal having IP capability includes an IP service network provided by an operator (ie, an operator) via various elements in the EPC, based on 3GPP access as well as non-3GPP access. For example, IMS).
또한, 도 1에서는 다양한 레퍼런스 포인트들(예를 들어, S1-U, S1-MME 등)을 도시한다. 3GPP 시스템에서는 E-UTRAN 및 EPC의 상이한 기능 개체(functional entity)들에 존재하는 2 개의 기능을 연결하는 개념적인 링크를 레퍼런스 포인트(reference point)라고 정의한다. 다음의 표 1은 도 1에 도시된 레퍼런스 포인트를 정리한 것이다. 표 1의 예시들 외에도 네트워크 구조에 따라 다양한 레퍼런스 포인트(reference point)들이 존재할 수 있다.1 illustrates various reference points (eg, S1-U, S1-MME, etc.). In the 3GPP system, a conceptual link defining two functions existing in different functional entities of E-UTRAN and EPC is defined as a reference point. Table 1 below summarizes the reference points shown in FIG. 1. In addition to the examples of Table 1, various reference points may exist according to the network structure.
도 1에 도시된 레퍼런스 포인트 중에서 S2a 및 S2b는 비-3GPP 인터페이스에 해당한다. S2a는 신뢰되는 비-3GPP 액세스 및 PDN GW 간의 관련 제어 및 이동성 자원을 사용자 플레인에 제공하는 레퍼런스 포인트이다. S2b는 ePDG 및 PDN GW 간의 관련 제어 및 이동성 지원을 사용자 플레인에 제공하는 레퍼런스 포인트이다. Among the reference points shown in FIG. 1, S2a and S2b correspond to non-3GPP interfaces. S2a is a reference point that provides the user plane with relevant control and mobility resources between trusted non-3GPP access and PDN GW. S2b is a reference point that provides the user plane with relevant control and mobility support between the ePDG and the PDN GW.
도 2는 본 발명이 적용될 수 있는 E-UTRAN(evolved universal terrestrial radio access network)의 네트워크 구조의 일 예를 나타낸다. 2 shows an example of a network structure of an evolved universal terrestrial radio access network (E-UTRAN) to which the present invention can be applied.
E-UTRAN 시스템은 기존 UTRAN 시스템에서 진화한 시스템으로, 예를 들어, 3GPP LTE/LTE-A 시스템일 수 있다. 통신 네트워크는 IMS 및 패킷 데이터를 통해 음성(voice)(예를 들어, VoIP(Voice over Internet Protocol))과 같은 다양한 통신 서비스를 제공하기 위하여 광범위하게 배치된다. The E-UTRAN system is an evolution from the existing UTRAN system and may be, for example, a 3GPP LTE / LTE-A system. Communication networks are widely deployed to provide various communication services, such as voice (eg, Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP)) over IMS and packet data.
도 2를 참조하면, E-UMTS 네트워크는 E-UTRAN, EPC 및 하나 이상의 UE를 포함한다. E-UTRAN은 단말에게 제어 평면(control plane)과 사용자 평면(user plane) 프로토콜을 제공하는 eNB들로 구성되고, eNB들은 X2 인터페이스를 통해 연결된다. Referring to FIG. 2, an E-UMTS network includes an E-UTRAN, an EPC, and one or more UEs. The E-UTRAN consists of eNBs providing a control plane and a user plane protocol to the UE, and the eNBs are connected through an X2 interface.
X2 사용자 평면 인터페이스(X2-U)는 eNB들 사이에 정의된다. X2-U 인터페이스는 사용자 평면 PDU(packet data unit)의 보장되지 않은 전달(non guaranteed delivery)을 제공한다. X2 제어 평면 인터페이스(X2-CP)는 두 개의 이웃 eNB 사이에 정의된다. X2-CP는 eNB 간의 컨텍스트(context) 전달, 소스 eNB와 타겟 eNB 사이의 사용자 평면 터널의 제어, 핸드오버 관련 메시지의 전달, 상향링크 부하 관리 등의 기능을 수행한다. X2 user plane interface (X2-U) is defined between eNBs. The X2-U interface provides non guaranteed delivery of user plane packet data units (PDUs). An X2 control plane interface (X2-CP) is defined between two neighboring eNBs. X2-CP performs functions such as context transfer between eNBs, control of user plane tunnel between source eNB and target eNB, delivery of handover related messages, and uplink load management.
eNB은 무선인터페이스를 통해 단말과 연결되고 S1 인터페이스를 통해 EPC(evolved packet core)에 연결된다. The eNB is connected to the terminal through a wireless interface and is connected to an evolved packet core (EPC) through the S1 interface.
S1 사용자 평면 인터페이스(S1-U)는 eNB와 서빙 게이트웨이(S-GW: serving gateway) 사이에 정의된다. S1 제어 평면 인터페이스(S1-MME)는 eNB와 이동성 관리 개체(MME: mobility management entity) 사이에 정의된다. S1 인터페이스는 EPS(evolved packet system) 베어러 서비스 관리 기능, NAS(non-access stratum) 시그널링 트랜스포트 기능, 네트워크 쉐어링, MME 부하 밸런싱 기능 등을 수행한다. S1 인터페이스는 eNB와 MME/S-GW 간에 다수-대-다수 관계(many-to-many-relation)를 지원한다. The S1 user plane interface (S1-U) is defined between the eNB and the serving gateway (S-GW). The S1 control plane interface (S1-MME) is defined between the eNB and the mobility management entity (MME). The S1 interface performs an evolved packet system (EPS) bearer service management function, a non-access stratum (NAS) signaling transport function, network sharing, and MME load balancing function. The S1 interface supports a many-to-many-relation between eNB and MME / S-GW.
MME는 NAS 시그널링 보안(security), AS(Access Stratum) 보안(security) 제어, 3GPP 액세스 네트워크 간 이동성을 지원하기 위한 CN(Core Network) 노드 간(Inter-CN) 시그널링, (페이징 재전송의 수행 및 제어 포함하여) 아이들(IDLE) 모드 UE 접근성(reachability), (아이들 및 액티브 모드 단말을 위한) 트래킹 영역 식별자(TAI: Tracking Area Identity) 관리, PDN GW 및 SGW 선택, MME가 변경되는 핸드오버를 위한 MME 선택, 2G 또는 3G 3GPP 액세스 네트워크로의 핸드오버를 위한 SGSN 선택, 로밍(roaming), 인증(authentication), 전용 베어러 확립(dedicated bearer establishment)를 포함하는 베어러 관리 기능, 공공 경고 시스템(PWS: Public Warning System)(지진 및 쓰나미 경고 시스템(ETWS: Earthquake and Tsunami Warning System) 및 상용 모바일 경고 시스템(CMAS: Commercial Mobile Alert System) 포함) 메시지 전송의 지원 등의 다양한 기능을 수행할 수 있다. MME provides NAS signaling security, access stratum (AS) security control, inter-CN inter-CN signaling to support mobility between 3GPP access networks, and performing and controlling paging retransmission. IDLE mode UE accessibility, tracking area identity (TAI) management (for children and active mode terminals), PDN GW and SGW selection, MME for handover with MME changes Public warning system (PWS), bearer management capabilities including optional, SGSN selection for handover to 2G or 3G 3GPP access networks, roaming, authentication, dedicated bearer establishment System (including Earthquake and Tsunami Warning System (ETWS) and Commercial Mobile Alert System (CMAS)) support for message transmission. Can.
도 3은 본 발명이 적용될 수 있는 무선 통신 시스템에서 E-UTRAN 및 EPC의 구조를 예시한다. 3 illustrates the structure of an E-UTRAN and an EPC in a wireless communication system to which the present invention can be applied.
도 3을 참조하면, eNB는 게이트웨이(예를 들어, MME)의 선택, 무선 자원 제어(RRC: radio resource control) 활성(activation) 동안 게이트웨이로의 라우팅, 방송 채널(BCH: broadcast channel)의 스케줄링 및 전송, 상향링크 및 하향링크에서 UE로 동적 자원 할당, 그리고 LTE_ACTIVE 상태에서 이동성 제어 연결의 기능을 수행할 수 있다. 상술한 바와 같이, EPC 내에서 게이트웨이는 페이징 개시(orgination), LTE_IDLE 상태 관리, 사용자 평면(user plane)의 암호화(ciphering), 시스템 구조 진화(SAE: System Architecture Evolution) 베어러 제어, 그리고 NAS 시그널링의 암호화(ciphering) 및 무결성(intergrity) 보호의 기능을 수행할 수 있다. Referring to FIG. 3, an eNB may select a gateway (eg, MME), route to the gateway during radio resource control (RRC) activation, scheduling of a broadcast channel (BCH), and the like. Dynamic resource allocation to the UE in transmission, uplink and downlink, and may perform the function of mobility control connection in the LTE_ACTIVE state. As mentioned above, within the EPC, the gateway is responsible for paging initiation, LTE_IDLE state management, ciphering of the user plane, System Architecture Evolution (SAE) bearer control, and NAS signaling encryption. It can perform the functions of ciphering and integrity protection.
도 4는 본 발명이 적용될 수 있는 무선 통신 시스템에서 단말과 E-UTRAN 사이의 무선 인터페이스 프로토콜(radio interface protocol) 구조를 나타낸다. 4 shows a structure of a radio interface protocol between a terminal and an E-UTRAN in a wireless communication system to which the present invention can be applied.
도 4(a)는 제어 평면(control plane)에 대한 무선 프로토콜 구조를 나타내고, 도 4(b)는 사용자 평면(user plane)에 대한 무선 프로토콜 구조를 나타낸다.FIG. 4 (a) shows the radio protocol structure for the control plane and FIG. 4 (b) shows the radio protocol structure for the user plane.
도 4를 참조하면, 단말과 E-UTRAN 사이의 무선 인터페이스 프로토콜의 계층들은 통신 시스템의 기술분야에 공지된 널리 알려진 개방형 시스템 간 상호접속(OSI: open system interconnection) 표준 모델의 하위 3 계층에 기초하여 제1 계층(L1), 제2 계층 (L2) 및 제3 계층 (L3)으로 분할될 수 있다. 단말과 E-UTRAN 사이의 무선 인터페이스 프로토콜은 수평적으로 물리계층(physical layer), 데이터링크 계층(data link layer) 및 네트워크 계층(network layer)으로 이루어지며, 수직적으로는 데이터 정보 전송을 위한 프로토콜 스택(protocol stack) 사용자 평면(user plane)과 제어신호(signaling) 전달을 위한 프로토콜 스택인 제어 평면(control plane)으로 구분된다. Referring to FIG. 4, the layers of the air interface protocol between the terminal and the E-UTRAN are based on the lower three layers of the open system interconnection (OSI) standard model known in the art of communication systems. It may be divided into a first layer L1, a second layer L2, and a third layer L3. The air interface protocol between the UE and the E-UTRAN consists of a physical layer, a data link layer, and a network layer horizontally, and vertically stacks a protocol stack for transmitting data information. (protocol stack) It is divided into a user plane and a control plane, which is a protocol stack for transmitting control signals.
제어평면은 단말과 네트워크가 호를 관리하기 위해서 이용하는 제어 메시지들이 전송되는 통로를 의미한다. 사용자 평면은 애플리케이션 계층에서 생성된 데이터, 예를 들어, 음성 데이터 또는 인터넷 패킷 데이터 등이 전송되는 통로를 의미한다. 이하, 무선 프로토콜의 제어평면과 사용자평면의 각 계층을 설명한다.The control plane refers to a path through which control messages used by the terminal and the network to manage a call are transmitted. The user plane refers to a path through which data generated at an application layer, for example, voice data or Internet packet data, is transmitted. Hereinafter, each layer of the control plane and the user plane of the radio protocol will be described.
제1 계층(L1)인 물리 계층(PHY: physical layer)은 물리 채널(physical channel)을 사용함으로써 상위 계층으로의 정보 송신 서비스(information transfer service)를 제공한다. 물리 계층은 상위 레벨에 위치한 매체 접속 제어(MAC: medium access control) 계층으로 전송 채널(transport channel)을 통하여 연결되고, 전송 채널을 통하여 MAC 계층과 물리 계층 사이에서 데이터가 전송된다. 전송 채널은 무선 인터페이스를 통해 데이터가 어떻게 어떤 특징으로 전송되는가에 따라 분류된다. 그리고, 서로 다른 물리 계층 사이, 송신단의 물리 계층과 수신단의 물리 계층 간에는 물리 채널(physical channel)을 통해 데이터가 전송된다. 물리 계층은 OFDM(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing) 방식으로 변조되며, 시간과 주파수를 무선 자원으로 활용한다.A physical layer (PHY), which is a first layer (L1), provides an information transfer service to a higher layer by using a physical channel. The physical layer is connected to a medium access control (MAC) layer located at a higher level through a transport channel, and data is transmitted between the MAC layer and the physical layer through the transport channel. Transport channels are classified according to how and with what characteristics data is transmitted over the air interface. In addition, data is transmitted between different physical layers through a physical channel between a physical layer of a transmitter and a physical layer of a receiver. The physical layer is modulated by an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) scheme and utilizes time and frequency as radio resources.
물리 계층에서 사용되는 몇몇 물리 제어 채널들이 있다. 물리 하향링크 제어 채널(PDCCH: physical downlink control channel)는 단말에게 페이징 채널(PCH: paging channel)와 하향링크 공유 채널(DL-SCH: downlink shared channel)의 자원 할당 및 상향링크 공유 채널(UL-SCH: uplink shared channel)과 관련된 HARQ(hybrid automatic repeat request) 정보를 알려준다. 또한, PDCCH는 단말에게 상향링크 전송의 자원 할당을 알려주는 상향링크 승인(UL grant)를 나를 수 있다. 물리 제어 포맷 지시자 채널(PDFICH: physical control format indicator channel)는 단말에게 PDCCH들에 사용되는 OFDM 심볼의 수를 알려주고, 매 서브프레임마다 전송된다. 물리 HARQ 지시자 채널(PHICH: physical HARQ indicator channel)는 상향링크 전송의 응답으로 HARQ ACK(acknowledge)/NACK(non-acknowledge) 신호를 나른다. 물리 상향링크 제어 채널(PUCCH: physical uplink control channel)은 하향링크 전송에 대한 HARQ ACK/NACK, 스케줄링 요청 및 채널 품질 지시자(CQI: channel quality indicator) 등과 같은 상향링크 제어 정보를 나른다. 물리 상향링크 공유 채널(PUSCH: physical uplink shared channel)은 UL-SCH을 나른다.There are several physical control channels used at the physical layer. A physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) is a resource allocation of a paging channel (PCH) and a downlink shared channel (DL-SCH) and uplink shared channel (UL-SCH) to the UE. : informs hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) information related to uplink shared channel (HARQ). In addition, the PDCCH may carry an UL grant that informs the UE of resource allocation of uplink transmission. The physical control format indicator channel (PDFICH) informs the UE of the number of OFDM symbols used for PDCCHs and is transmitted every subframe. A physical HARQ indicator channel (PHICH) carries a HARQ acknowledgment (ACK) / non-acknowledge (NACK) signal in response to uplink transmission. The physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) carries uplink control information such as HARQ ACK / NACK, downlink request and channel quality indicator (CQI) for downlink transmission. A physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) carries a UL-SCH.
제2 계층(L2)의 MAC 계층은 논리 채널(logical channel)을 통하여 상위 계층인 무선 링크 제어(RLC: radio link control) 계층에게 서비스를 제공한다. 또한, MAC 계층은 논리 채널과 전송 채널 간의 맵핑 및 논리 채널에 속하는 MAC 서비스 데이터 유닛(SDU: service data unit)의 전송 채널 상에 물리 채널로 제공되는 전송 블록(transport block)으로의 다중화/역다중화 기능을 포함한다. The MAC layer of the second layer (L2) provides a service to a radio link control (RLC) layer, which is a higher layer, through a logical channel. In addition, the MAC layer multiplexes / demultiplexes into a transport block provided as a physical channel on a transport channel of a MAC service data unit (SDU) belonging to the logical channel and mapping between the logical channel and the transport channel. Includes features
제2 계층(L2)의 RLC 계층은 신뢰성 있는 데이터 전송을 지원한다. RLC 계층의 기능은 RLC SDU의 연결(concatenation), 분할(segmentation) 및 재결합(reassembly)을 포함한다. 무선 베어러(RB: radio bearer)가 요구하는 다양한 QoS(quality of service)를 보장하기 위해, RLC 계층은 투명 모드(TM: transparent mode), 비확인 모드(UM: unacknowledged mode) 및 확인 모드(AM: acknowledge mode)의 세 가지의 동작 모드를 제공한다. AM RLC는 ARQ(automatic repeat request)를 통해 오류 정정을 제공한다. 한편, MAC 계층이 RLC 기능을 수행하는 경우에 RLC 계층은 MAC 계층의 기능 블록으로 포함될 수 있다. The RLC layer of the second layer (L2) supports reliable data transmission. Functions of the RLC layer include concatenation, segmentation, and reassembly of RLC SDUs. In order to guarantee the various quality of service (QoS) required by the radio bearer (RB), the RLC layer has a transparent mode (TM), an unacknowledged mode (UM) and an acknowledgment mode (AM). There are three modes of operation: acknowledge mode. AM RLC provides error correction through an automatic repeat request (ARQ). Meanwhile, when the MAC layer performs an RLC function, the RLC layer may be included as a functional block of the MAC layer.
제2 계층(L2)의 패킷 데이터 컨버전스 프로토콜(PDCP: packet data convergence protocol) 계층은 사용자 평면에서 사용자 데이터의 전달, 헤더 압축(header compression) 및 암호화(ciphering) 기능을 수행한다. 헤더 압축 기능은 작은 대역폭을 가지는 무선 인터페이스를 통하여 IPv4(internet protocol version 4) 또는 IPv6(internet protocol version 6)와 같은 인터넷 프로토콜(IP: internet protocol) 패킷을 효율적으로 전송되게 하기 위하여 상대적으로 크기가 크고 불필요한 제어 정보를 담고 있는 IP 패킷 헤더 사이즈를 줄이는 기능을 의미한다. 제어 평면에서의 PDCP 계층의 기능은 제어 평면 데이터의 전달 및 암호화/무결정 보호(integrity protection)을 포함한다.The packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer of the second layer (L2) performs user data transmission, header compression, and ciphering functions in the user plane. Header compression is relatively large and large in order to allow efficient transmission of Internet protocol (IP) packets, such as IPv4 (internet protocol version 4) or IPv6 (internet protocol version 6), over a small bandwidth wireless interface. It means the function to reduce the IP packet header size that contains unnecessary control information. The function of the PDCP layer in the control plane includes the transfer of control plane data and encryption / integrity protection.
제3 계층(L3)의 최하위 부분에 위치한 무선 자원 제어(RRC: radio resource control) 계층은 제어 평면에만 정의된다. RRC 계층은 단말과 네트워크 간의 무선 자원을 제어하는 역할을 수행한다. 이를 위해 단말과 네트워크는 RRC 계층을 통해 RRC 메시지를 서로 교환한다. RRC 계층은 무선 베어러들의 설정(configuration), 재설정(re-configuration) 및 해제(release)와 관련하여 논리 채널, 전송 채널 및 물리 채널을 제어한다. 무선 베어러는 단말과 네트워크 사이의 데이터 전송을 위하여 제2 계층(L2)에 의하여 제공되는 논리적인 경로를 의미한다. 무선 베어러가 설정된다는 것은 특정 서비스를 제공하기 위해 무선 프로토콜 계층 및 채널의 특성을 규정하고, 각각의 구체적인 파라미터 및 동작 방법을 설정하는 것을 의미한다. 무선 베어러는 다시 시그널링 무선 베어러(SRB: signaling RB)와 데이터 무선 베어러(DRB: data RB) 두 가지로 나눠 질 수 있다. SRB는 제어 평면에서 RRC 메시지를 전송하는 통로로 사용되며, DRB는 사용자 평면에서 사용자 데이터를 전송하는 통로로 사용된다.A radio resource control (RRC) layer located at the lowest part of the third layer L3 is defined only in the control plane. The RRC layer serves to control radio resources between the terminal and the network. To this end, the UE and the network exchange RRC messages with each other through the RRC layer. The RRC layer controls the logical channel, transport channel and physical channel with respect to configuration, re-configuration and release of radio bearers. The radio bearer means a logical path provided by the second layer (L2) for data transmission between the terminal and the network. Establishing a radio bearer means defining characteristics of a radio protocol layer and a channel to provide a specific service, and setting each specific parameter and operation method. The radio bearer may be further divided into two signaling radio bearers (SRBs) and data radio bearers (DRBs). The SRB is used as a path for transmitting RRC messages in the control plane, and the DRB is used as a path for transmitting user data in the user plane.
RRC 계층 상위에 위치하는 NAS(non-access stratum) 계층은 세션 관리(session management)와 이동성 관리(mobility management) 등의 기능을 수행한다. A non-access stratum (NAS) layer located above the RRC layer performs functions such as session management and mobility management.
기지국을 구성하는 하나의 셀은 1.25, 2.5, 5, 10, 20Mhz 등의 대역폭 중 하나로 설정되어 여러 단말에게 하향 또는 상향 전송 서비스를 제공한다. 서로 다른 셀은 서로 다른 대역폭을 제공하도록 설정될 수 있다.One cell constituting the base station is set to one of the bandwidth, such as 1.25, 2.5, 5, 10, 20Mhz to provide a downlink or uplink transmission service to multiple terminals. Different cells may be configured to provide different bandwidths.
네트워크에서 단말로 데이터를 전송하는 하향 전송채널(downlink transport channel)은 시스템 정보를 전송하는 방송 채널(BCH: broadcast channel), 페이징 메시지를 전송하는 PCH, 사용자 트래픽이나 제어메시지를 전송하는 DL-SCH 등이 있다. 하향 멀티캐스트 또는 방송 서비스의 트래픽 또는 제어메시지의 경우 DL-SCH를 통해 전송될 수도 있고, 또는 별도의 하향 멀티캐스트 채널(MCH: multicast channel)을 통해 전송될 수도 있다. 한편, 단말에서 네트워크로 데이터를 전송하는 상향 전송채널(uplink transport channel)로는 초기 제어메시지를 전송하는 랜덤 액세스 채널(RACH: random access channel), 사용자 트래픽이나 제어메시지를 전송하는 UL-SCH(uplink shared channel)가 있다. A downlink transport channel for transmitting data from a network to a terminal includes a broadcast channel (BCH) for transmitting system information, a PCH for transmitting a paging message, and a DL-SCH for transmitting user traffic or control messages. There is this. Traffic or control messages of the downlink multicast or broadcast service may be transmitted through the DL-SCH or may be transmitted through a separate downlink multicast channel (MCH). Meanwhile, an uplink transport channel for transmitting data from a terminal to a network includes a random access channel (RACH) for transmitting an initial control message, and an UL-SCH (uplink shared) for transmitting user traffic or a control message. channel).
논리 채널(logical channel)은 전송 채널의 상위에 있으며, 전송 채널에 맵핑된다. 논리 채널은 제어 영역 정보의 전달을 위한 제어 채널과 사용자 영역 정보의 전달을 위한 트래픽 채널로 구분될 수 있다. 제어 채널로는 방송 제어 채널(BCCH: broadcast control channel), 페이징 제어 채널(PCCH: paging control channel), 공통 제어 채널(CCCH: common control channel), 전용 제어 채널(DCCH: dedicated control channel), 멀티캐스트 제어 채널(MCCH: multicast control channel) 등이 있다. 트래픽 채널로는 전용 트래픽 채널(DTCH: dedicated traffic channel), 멀티캐스트 트래픽 채널(MTCH: multicast traffic channel) 등이 있다. PCCH는 페이징 정보를 전달하는 하향링크 채널이고, 네트워크가 UE가 속한 셀을 모를 때 사용된다. CCCH는 네트워크와의 RRC 연결을 가지지 않는 UE에 의해 사용된다. MCCH 네트워크로부터 UE로의 MBMS(Multimedia Broadcast and Multicast Service) 제어 정보를 전달하기 위하여 사용되는 점-대-다점(point-to-multipoint) 하향링크 채널이다. DCCH는 UE와 네트워크 간에 전용 제어 정보를 전달하는 RRC 연결을 가지는 단말에 의해 사용되는 일-대-일(point-to-point) 양방향(bi-directional) 채널이다. DTCH는 상향링크 및 하향링크에서 존재할 수 있는 사용자 정보를 전달하기 위하여 하나의 단말에 전용되는 일-대-일(point-to-point) 채널이다. MTCH는 네트워크로부터 UE로의 트래픽 데이터를 전달하기 위하여 일-대-다(point-to-multipoint) 하향링크 채널이다.The logical channel is on top of the transport channel and is mapped to the transport channel. The logical channel may be divided into a control channel for transmitting control region information and a traffic channel for delivering user region information. The control channel includes a broadcast control channel (BCCH), a paging control channel (PCCH), a common control channel (CCCH), a dedicated control channel (DCCH), multicast And a control channel (MCCH: multicast control channel). Traffic channels include a dedicated traffic channel (DTCH) and a multicast traffic channel (MTCH). PCCH is a downlink channel that carries paging information and is used when the network does not know the cell to which the UE belongs. CCCH is used by a UE that does not have an RRC connection with the network. A point-to-multipoint downlink channel used to convey multimedia broadcast and multicast service (MBMS) control information from an MCCH network to a UE. The DCCH is a point-to-point bi-directional channel used by a terminal having an RRC connection for transferring dedicated control information between the UE and the network. DTCH is a point-to-point channel dedicated to one terminal for transmitting user information that may exist in uplink and downlink. MTCH is a point-to-multipoint downlink channel for carrying traffic data from the network to the UE.
논리 채널(logical channel)과 전송 채널(transport channel) 간 상향링크 연결의 경우, DCCH는 UL-SCH과 매핑될 수 있고, DTCH는 UL-SCH와 매핑될 수 있으며, CCCH는 UL-SCH와 매핑될 수 있다. 논리 채널(logical channel)과 전송 채널(transport channel) 간 하향링크 연결의 경우, BCCH는 BCH 또는 DL-SCH와 매핑될 수 있고, PCCH는 PCH와 매핑될 수 있으며, DCCH는 DL-SCH와 매핑될 수 있으며, DTCH는 DL-SCH와 매핑될 수 있으며, MCCH는 MCH와 매핑될 수 있으며, MTCH는 MCH와 매핑될 수 있다. In the case of an uplink connection between a logical channel and a transport channel, the DCCH may be mapped to the UL-SCH, the DTCH may be mapped to the UL-SCH, and the CCCH may be mapped to the UL-SCH. Can be. In the case of a downlink connection between a logical channel and a transport channel, the BCCH may be mapped with the BCH or DL-SCH, the PCCH may be mapped with the PCH, and the DCCH may be mapped with the DL-SCH. The DTCH may be mapped with the DL-SCH, the MCCH may be mapped with the MCH, and the MTCH may be mapped with the MCH.
도 5는 본 발명이 적용될 수 있는 무선 통신 시스템에서 S1 인터페이스 프로토콜 구조를 나타낸다.5 shows an S1 interface protocol structure in a wireless communication system to which the present invention can be applied.
도 5(a)는 S1 인터페이스에서 제어 평면(control plane) 프로토콜 스택을 예시하고, 도 5(b)는 S1 인터페이스에서 사용자 평면(user plane) 인터페이스 프로토콜 구조를 나타낸다.FIG. 5A illustrates a control plane protocol stack in an S1 interface, and FIG. 5B illustrates a user plane interface protocol structure in an S1 interface.
도 4를 참조하면, S1 제어 평면 인터페이스(S1-MME)는 기지국과 MME 간에 정의된다. 사용자 평면과 유사하게 전송 네트워크 계층(transport network layer)은 IP 전송에 기반한다. 다만, 메시지 시그널링의 신뢰성이 있는 전송을 위해 IP 계층 상위에 SCTP(Stream Control Transmission Protocol) 계층에 추가된다. 어플리케이션 계층(application layer) 시그널링 프로토콜은 S1-AP(S1 application protocol)로 지칭된다. 4, the S1 control plane interface (S1-MME) is defined between the base station and the MME. Similar to the user plane, the transport network layer is based on IP transport. However, it is added to the SCTP (Stream Control Transmission Protocol) layer above the IP layer for reliable transmission of message signaling. The application layer signaling protocol is referred to as S1-AP (S1 application protocol).
SCTP 계층은 어플리케이션 계층 메시지의 보장된(guaranteed) 전달을 제공한다. The SCTP layer provides guaranteed delivery of application layer messages.
프로토콜 데이터 유닛(PDU: Protocol Data Unit) 시그널링 전송을 위해 전송 IP 계층에서 점대점 (point-to-point) 전송이 사용된다. Point-to-point transmission is used at the transport IP layer for protocol data unit (PDU) signaling transmission.
S1-MME 인터페이스 인스턴스(instance) 별로 단일의 SCTP 연계(association)는 S-MME 공통 절차를 위한 한 쌍의 스트림 식별자(stream identifier)를 사용한다. 스트림 식별자의 일부 쌍만이 S1-MME 전용 절차를 위해 사용된다. MME 통신 컨텍스트 식별자는 S1-MME 전용 절차를 위한 MME에 의해 할당되고, eNB 통신 컨텍스트 식별자는 S1-MME 전용 절차를 위한 eNB에 의해 할당된다. MME 통신 컨텍스트 식별자 및 eNB 통신 컨텍스트 식별자는 단말 특정한 S1-MME 시그널링 전송 베어러를 구별하기 위하여 사용된다. 통신 컨텍스트 식별자는 각각 S1-AP 메시지 내에서 전달된다.A single SCTP association per S1-MME interface instance uses a pair of stream identifiers for the S-MME common procedure. Only some pairs of stream identifiers are used for the S1-MME dedicated procedure. The MME communication context identifier is assigned by the MME for the S1-MME dedicated procedure, and the eNB communication context identifier is assigned by the eNB for the S1-MME dedicated procedure. The MME communication context identifier and the eNB communication context identifier are used to distinguish the UE-specific S1-MME signaling transmission bearer. Communication context identifiers are each carried in an S1-AP message.
S1 시그널링 전송 계층이 S1AP 계층에게 시그널링 연결이 단절되었다고 통지한 경우, MME는 해당 시그널링 연결을 사용하였던 단말의 상태를 ECM-IDLE 상태로 변경한다. 그리고, eNB은 해당 단말의 RRC 연결을 해제한다. When the S1 signaling transport layer notifies the S1AP layer that the signaling connection is disconnected, the MME changes the state of the terminal that used the signaling connection to the ECM-IDLE state. And, the eNB releases the RRC connection of the terminal.
S1 사용자 평면 인터페이스(S1-U)는 eNB과 S-GW 간에 정의된다. S1-U 인터페이스는 eNB와 S-GW 간에 사용자 평면 PDU의 보장되지 않은(non guaranteed) 전달을 제공한다. 전송 네트워크 계층은 IP 전송에 기반하고, eNB와 S-GW 간의 사용자 평면 PDU를 전달하기 위하여 UDP/IP 계층 상위에 GTP-U(GPRS Tunneling Protocol User Plane) 계층이 이용된다. S1 user plane interface (S1-U) is defined between the eNB and the S-GW. The S1-U interface provides non-guaranteed delivery of user plane PDUs between the eNB and the S-GW. The transport network layer is based on IP transmission, and a GPRS Tunneling Protocol User Plane (GTP-U) layer is used above the UDP / IP layer to transfer user plane PDUs between the eNB and the S-GW.
도 6은 본 발명이 적용될 수 있는 무선 통신 시스템에서 물리 채널의 구조를 간략히 예시하는 도면이다. 6 is a diagram exemplarily illustrating a structure of a physical channel in a wireless communication system to which the present invention can be applied.
도 6을 참조하면, 물리 채널은 주파수 영역(frequency domain)에서 하나 이상의 서브캐리어와 시간 영역(time domain)에서 하나 이상의 심볼로 구성되는 무선 자원을 통해 시그널링 및 데이터를 전달한다. Referring to FIG. 6, a physical channel transmits signaling and data through a radio resource including one or more subcarriers in a frequency domain and one or more symbols in a time domain.
1.0ms 길이를 가지는 하나의 서브프레임은 복수의 심볼로 구성된다. 서브프레임의 특정 심볼(들)(예를 들어, 서브프레임의 첫번째 심볼)은 PDCCH를 위해 사용될 수 있다. PDCCH는 동적으로 할당되는 자원에 대한 정보(예를 들어, 자원 블록(Resource Block), 변조 및 코딩 방식(MCS: Modulation and Coding Scheme) 등)를 나른다.One subframe having a length of 1.0 ms is composed of a plurality of symbols. The specific symbol (s) of the subframe (eg, the first symbol of the subframe) can be used for the PDCCH. The PDCCH carries information about dynamically allocated resources (eg, a resource block, a modulation and coding scheme (MCS), etc.).
EMMEMM 및 ECM 상태 And ECM status
EMM(EPS mobility management), ECM(EPS connection management) 상태에 대하여 살펴본다.It looks at the status of EPS mobility management (EMM) and EPS connection management (ECM).
도 7은 본 발명이 적용될 수 있는 무선 통신 시스템에서 EMM 및 ECM 상태를 예시하는 도면이다. 7 is a diagram illustrating EMM and ECM states in a wireless communication system to which the present invention can be applied.
도 7을 참조하면, 단말과 MME의 제어 평면에 위치한 NAS 계층에서 단말의 이동성을 관리하기 위하여 단말이 네트워크에 어태치(attach)되었는지 디태치(detach)되었는지에 따라 EMM 등록 상태(EMM-REGISTERED) 및 EMM 등록 해제 상태(EMM-DEREGISTERED)가 정의될 수 있다. EMM-REGISTERED 상태 및 EMM-DEREGISTERED 상태는 단말과 MME에게 적용될 수 있다. Referring to FIG. 7, an EMM registered state (EMM-REGISTERED) according to whether a UE is attached or detached from a network in order to manage mobility of the UE in a NAS layer located in a control plane of the UE and the MME. And an EMM deregistration state (EMM-DEREGISTERED) may be defined. The EMM-REGISTERED state and the EMM-DEREGISTERED state may be applied to the terminal and the MME.
단말의 전원을 최초로 켠 경우와 같이 초기 단말은 EMM-DEREGISTERED 상태에 있으며, 이 단말이 네트워크에 접속하기 위해서 초기 접속(initial attach) 절차를 통해 해당 네트워크에 등록하는 과정을 수행한다. 접속 절차가 성공적으로 수행되면 단말 및 MME는 EMM-REGISTERED 상태로 천이(transition)된다. 또한, 단말의 전원이 꺼지거나 무선 링크 실패인 경우(무선 링크 상에서 패킷 에러율이 기준치를 넘은 경우), 단말은 네트워크에서 디태치(detach)되어 EMM-DEREGISTERED 상태로 천이된다.As in the case of powering on the terminal for the first time, the initial terminal is in the EMM-DEREGISTERED state, and the terminal performs a process of registering with the corresponding network through an initial attach procedure to access the network. If the access procedure is successfully performed, the UE and the MME are transitioned to the EMM-REGISTERED state. In addition, when the terminal is powered off or the radio link fails (when the packet error rate exceeds the reference value on the wireless link), the terminal is detached from the network and transitioned to the EMM-DEREGISTERED state.
또한, 단말과 네트워크 간 시그널링 연결(signaling connection)을 관리하기 위하여 ECM 연결 상태(ECM-CONNECTED) 및 ECM 아이들 상태(ECM-IDLE)가 정의될 수 있다. ECM-CONNECTED 상태 및 ECM-IDLE 상태 또한 단말과 MME에게 적용될 수 있다. ECM 연결은 단말과 기지국 간에 설정되는 RRC 연결과 기지국과 MME 간에 설정되는 S1 시그널링 연결로 구성된다. 즉, ECM 연결이 설정/해제되었다는 것은 RRC 연결과 S1 시그널링 연결이 모두 설정/해제되었다는 것을 의미한다. In addition, an ECM-connected state and an ECM idle state (ECM-IDLE) may be defined to manage a signaling connection between the terminal and the network. ECM-CONNECTED state and ECM-IDLE state may also be applied to the UE and the MME. The ECM connection consists of an RRC connection established between the terminal and the base station and an S1 signaling connection established between the base station and the MME. In other words, when the ECM connection is set / released, it means that both the RRC connection and the S1 signaling connection are set / released.
RRC 상태는 단말의 RRC 계층과 기지국의 RRC 계층이 논리적으로 연결(connection)되어 있는지 여부를 나타낸다. 즉, 단말의 RRC 계층과 기지국의 RRC 계층이 연결되어 있는 경우, 단말은 RRC 연결 상태(RRC_CONNECTED)에 있게 된다. 단말의 RRC 계층과 기지국의 RRC 계층이 연결되어 있지 않은 경우, 단말은 RRC 아이들 상태(RRC_IDLE)에 있게 된다. The RRC state indicates whether the RRC layer of the terminal and the RRC layer of the base station are logically connected. That is, when the RRC layer of the terminal and the RRC layer of the base station is connected, the terminal is in the RRC connected state (RRC_CONNECTED). If the RRC layer of the terminal and the RRC layer of the base station is not connected, the terminal is in the RRC idle state (RRC_IDLE).
네트워크는 ECM-CONNECTED 상태에 있는 단말의 존재를 셀 단위에서 파악할 수 있고, 단말을 효과적으로 제어할 수 있다. The network can grasp the existence of the terminal in the ECM-CONNECTED state in units of cells and can effectively control the terminal.
반면, 네트워크는 ECM-IDLE 상태에 있는 단말의 존재를 파악할 수 없으며, 코어 네트워크(CN: core network)가 셀보다 더 큰 지역 단위인 트래킹 영역(tracking area) 단위로 관리한다. 단말이 ECM 아이들 상태에 있을 때에는 단말은 트래킹 영역에서 유일하게 할당된 ID를 이용하여 NAS에 의해 설정된 불연속 수신(DRX: Discontinuous Reception)을 수행한다. 즉, 단말은 단말-특정 페이징 DRX 사이클 마다 특정 페이징 시점(paging occasion)에 페이징 신호를 모니터링함으로써 시스템 정보 및 페이징 정보의 브로드캐스트를 수신할 수 있다. On the other hand, the network cannot grasp the existence of the UE in the ECM-IDLE state, and manages the core network (CN) in a tracking area unit that is a larger area than the cell. When the terminal is in the ECM idle state, the terminal performs Discontinuous Reception (DRX) set by the NAS using an ID assigned only in the tracking area. That is, the UE may receive broadcast of system information and paging information by monitoring a paging signal at a specific paging occasion every UE-specific paging DRX cycle.
또한, 단말이 ECM-IDLE 상태에 있을 때에는 네트워크는 단말의 컨텍스트(context) 정보를 가지고 있지 않다. 따라서 ECM-IDLE 상태의 단말은 네트워크의 명령을 받을 필요 없이 셀 선택(cell selection) 또는 셀 재선택(cell reselection)과 같은 단말 기반의 이동성 관련 절차를 수행할 수 있다. ECM 아이들 상태에서 단말의 위치가 네트워크가 알고 있는 위치와 달라지는 경우, 단말은 트래킹 영역 업데이트(TAU: tracking area update) 절차를 통해 네트워크에 해당 단말의 위치를 알릴 수 있다. In addition, when the terminal is in the ECM-IDLE state, the network does not have context information of the terminal. Accordingly, the UE in the ECM-IDLE state may perform a terminal-based mobility related procedure such as cell selection or cell reselection without receiving a command from the network. In the ECM idle state, when the location of the terminal is different from the location known by the network, the terminal may inform the network of the location of the terminal through a tracking area update (TAU) procedure.
반면, 단말이 ECM-CONNECTED 상태에 있을 때에는 단말의 이동성은 네트워크의 명령에 의해서 관리된다. ECM-CONNECTED 상태에서 네트워크는 단말이 속한 셀을 안다. 따라서, 네트워크는 단말로 또는 단말로부터 데이터를 전송 및/또는 수신하고, 단말의 핸드오버와 같은 이동성을 제어하고, 주변 셀에 대한 셀 측정을 수행할 수 있다. On the other hand, when the terminal is in the ECM-CONNECTED state, the mobility of the terminal is managed by the command of the network. In the ECM-CONNECTED state, the network knows the cell to which the UE belongs. Accordingly, the network may transmit and / or receive data to or from the terminal, control mobility such as handover of the terminal, and perform cell measurement on neighbor cells.
위와 같이, 단말이 음성이나 데이터와 같은 통상의 이동통신 서비스를 받기 위해서는 ECM-CONNECTED 상태로 천이하여야 한다. 단말의 전원을 최초로 켠 경우와 같이 초기 단말은 EMM 상태와 마찬가지로 ECM-IDLE 상태에 있으며, 단말이 초기 접속(initial attach) 절차를 통해 해당 네트워크에 성공적으로 등록하게 되면 단말 및 MME는 ECM 연결 상태로 천이(transition)된다. 또한, 단말이 네트워크에 등록되어 있으나 트래픽이 비활성화되어 무선 자원이 할당되어 있지 않은 경우 단말은 ECM-IDLE 상태에 있으며, 해당 단말에 상향링크 혹은 하향링크 새로운 트래픽이 발생되면 서비스 요청(service request) 절차를 통해 단말 및 MME는 ECM-CONNECTED 상태로 천이(transition)된다. As described above, the terminal needs to transition to the ECM-CONNECTED state in order to receive a normal mobile communication service such as voice or data. As in the case of powering on the terminal for the first time, the initial terminal is in the ECM-IDLE state as in the EMM state, and when the terminal is successfully registered in the network through an initial attach procedure, the terminal and the MME are in the ECM connection state. Transition is made. In addition, if the terminal is registered in the network but the traffic is inactivated and the radio resources are not allocated, the terminal is in the ECM-IDLE state, and if a new traffic is generated uplink or downlink to the terminal, a service request procedure UE and MME is transitioned to the ECM-CONNECTED state through.
EPS EPS 베어러Bearer (bearer)(bearer)
도 8은 본 발명이 적용될 수 있는 무선 통신 시스템에서 베어러 구조를 예시한다. 8 illustrates a bearer structure in a wireless communication system to which the present invention can be applied.
단말이 패킷 데이터 네트워크(PDN: Packet Date Network)(도 8에서 피어 엔티티(peer entity))에 연결될 때 PDN 연결(PDN connection)이 생성되고, PDN connection은 EPS 세션(session)으로도 불릴 수 있다. PDN은 사업자 외부 또는 내부 IP (internet protocol) 망으로 인터넷이나 IMS(IP Multimedia Subsystem)와 같은 서비스 기능을 제공한다.When a terminal is connected to a packet date network (PDN) (peer entity in FIG. 8), a PDN connection is generated, and the PDN connection may also be referred to as an EPS session. PDN is a service provider's external or internal IP (internet protocol) network to provide service functions such as the Internet or IMS (IP Multimedia Subsystem).
EPS session은 하나 이상의 EPS 베어러(bearer)를 가진다. EPS bearer는 EPS에서 사용자 트래픽을 전달하기 위하여 단말과 PDN GW 간에 생성되는 트래픽의 전송 경로(transmission path)이다. EPS bearer는 단말 당 하나 이상 설정될 수 있다.EPS sessions have one or more EPS bearers. The EPS bearer is a transmission path of traffic generated between the UE and the PDN GW in order to deliver user traffic in EPS. One or more EPS bearers may be set per terminal.
각 EPS bearer는 E-UTRAN 무선 액세스 베어러(E-RAB: E-UTRAN Radio Access Bearer) 및 S5/S8 bearer로 나누어질 수 있고, E-RAB 는 무선 베어러(RB: radio bearer), S1 bearer로 나누어질 수 있다. 즉, 하나의 EPS bearer는 각각 하나의 RB, S1 bearer, S5/S8 bearer 에 대응된다. Each EPS bearer may be divided into an E-UTRAN radio access bearer (E-RAB) and an S5 / S8 bearer, and the E-RAB is divided into a radio bearer (RB: radio bearer) and an S1 bearer. Can lose. That is, one EPS bearer corresponds to one RB, S1 bearer, and S5 / S8 bearer, respectively.
E-RAB 는 단말과 EPC 간에 EPS bearer의 패킷을 전달한다. E-RAB가 존재하면, E-RAB bearer와 EPS bearer는 일대일로 매핑된다. 데이터 무선 베어러(DRB: data radio bearer)는 단말과 eNB 간에 EPS bearer의 패킷을 전달한다. DRB가 존재하면, DRB와 EPS bearer/E-RAB 는 일대일로 매핑된다. S1 bearer는 eNB와 S-GW 간에 EPS bearer의 패킷을 전달한다. S5/S8 bearer는 S-GW와 P-GW 간에 EPS bearer 패킷을 전달한다. The E-RAB delivers the packet of the EPS bearer between the terminal and the EPC. If there is an E-RAB, the E-RAB bearer and the EPS bearer are mapped one-to-one. A data radio bearer (DRB) transfers a packet of an EPS bearer between a terminal and an eNB. If the DRB exists, the DRB and the EPS bearer / E-RAB are mapped one-to-one. The S1 bearer delivers the packet of the EPS bearer between the eNB and the S-GW. The S5 / S8 bearer delivers an EPS bearer packet between the S-GW and the P-GW.
단말은 상향링크 방향의 EPS bearer 에 서비스 데이터 플로우(SDF: service data flow)를 바인딩(binding) 한다. SDF는 사용자 트래픽을 서비스 별로 분류(또는 필터링) 한 IP 플로우(flow) 또는 IP flow들의 모임이다. 복수의 SDF들은 복수의 상향링크 패킷 필터들을 포함함으로써 동일한 EPS bearer에 다중화될 수 있다. 단말은 상향링크에서 SDF와 DRB 간 binding하기 위하여 상향링크 패킷 필터와 DRB 간 매핑 정보를 저장한다. The UE binds a service data flow (SDF) to the EPS bearer in the uplink direction. SDF is an IP flow or collection of IP flows that classifies (or filters) user traffic by service. A plurality of SDFs may be multiplexed onto the same EPS bearer by including a plurality of uplink packet filters. The terminal stores mapping information between the uplink packet filter and the DRB in order to bind between the SDF and the DRB in the uplink.
P-GW 은 하향링크 방향의 EPS bearer에 SDF를 binding한다. 복수의 SDF들은 복수의 하향링크 패킷 필터들을 포함함으로써 동일한 EPS bearer에 다중화될 수 있다. P-GW는 하향링크에서 SDF와 S5/S8 bearer 간 binding 하기 위하여 하향링크 패킷 필터와 S5/S8 bearer 간 매핑 정보를 저장한다. P-GW binds SDF to EPS bearer in downlink direction. A plurality of SDFs may be multiplexed on the same EPS bearer by including a plurality of downlink packet filters. The P-GW stores the mapping information between the downlink packet filter and the S5 / S8 bearer to bind between the SDF and the S5 / S8 bearer in the downlink.
eNB은 상/하향링크에서 DRB와 S1 bearer 간 binding 하기 위하여 DRB와 S1 bearer 간 일대일 매핑을 저장한다. S-GW는 상/하향링크에서 S1 bearer와 S5/S8 bearer 간 binding 하기 위하여 S1 bearer와 S5/S8 bearer 간 일대일 매핑 정보를 저장한다.The eNB stores a one-to-one mapping between the DRB and the S1 bearer to bind between the DRB and the S1 bearer in the uplink / downlink. S-GW stores one-to-one mapping information between S1 bearer and S5 / S8 bearer in order to bind between S1 bearer and S5 / S8 bearer in uplink / downlink.
EPS bearer는 기본 베어러(default bearer)와 전용 베어러(dedicated bearer) 두 종류로 구분된다. 단말은 PDN 당 하나의 default bearer와 하나 이상의 dedicated bearer 를 가질 수 있다. 하나의 PDN에 대하여 EPS 세션이 갖는 최소한의 기본 베어러를 default bearer라 한다. EPS bearers are classified into two types: a default bearer and a dedicated bearer. The terminal may have one default bearer and one or more dedicated bearers per PDN. The minimum default bearer of the EPS session for one PDN is called a default bearer.
EPS bearer는 식별자(identity)를 기반으로 구분될 수 있다. EPS bearer identity는 단말 또는 MME에 의해 할당된다. dedicated bearer(s)은 LBI(Linked EPS Bearer Identity)에 의해 default bearer와 결합된다. The EPS bearer may be classified based on an identifier. EPS bearer identity is assigned by the terminal or the MME. The dedicated bearer (s) is combined with the default bearer by Linked EPS Bearer Identity (LBI).
단말은 초기 어태치 절차(initial attach procedure)를 통해 네트워크에 초기 접속하면, IP 주소를 할당 받아 PDN connection이 생성되고, EPS 구간에서 default bearer가 생성된다. default bearer는 단말과 해당 PDN 간 트래픽이 없는 경우에도 단말이 PDN 연결이 종료되지 않는 한 해제되지 않고 유지되며, 해당 PDN 연결을 종료될 때 default bearer도 해제된다. 여기서, 단말과 default bearer를 구성하는 모든 구간의 bearer가 활성화되는 것은 아니고, PDN과 직접 연결되어 있는 S5 bearer는 유지되고, 무선 자원과 연관이 있는 E-RAB bearer (즉, DRB and S1 bearer)는 해제된다. 그리고, 해당 PDN에서 새로운 트래픽이 발생되면 E-RAB bearer가 재설정되어 트래픽을 전달한다. When the terminal initially accesses the network through an initial attach procedure, a PDN connection is generated by assigning an IP address, and a default bearer is generated in the EPS section. Even if there is no traffic between the terminal and the corresponding PDN, the default bearer is not released unless the terminal terminates the PDN connection, and the default bearer is released when the corresponding PDN connection is terminated. Here, the bearer of all sections constituting the terminal and the default bearer is not activated, the S5 bearer directly connected to the PDN is maintained, the E-RAB bearer (ie DRB and S1 bearer) associated with the radio resource is Is released. When new traffic is generated in the corresponding PDN, the E-RAB bearer is reset to deliver the traffic.
단말이 default bearer를 통해 서비스(예를 들어, 인터넷 등)를 이용하는 중에, default bearer만으로 QoS(Quality of Service)를 제공 받기 불충분한 서비스(예를 들어, VoD(Videon on Demand) 등)를 이용하게 되면 단말에서 요구할 때(on-demand)로 dedicated bearer가 생성된다. 단말의 트래픽이 없는 경우 dedicated bearer는 해제된다. 단말이나 네트워크는 필요에 따라 복수의 dedicated bearer를 생성할 수 있다. While the terminal uses a service (for example, the Internet, etc.) through a default bearer, the terminal may use an insufficient service (for example, Videon on Demand (VOD), etc.) to receive a Quality of Service (QoS) with only the default bearer. Dedicated bearer is generated when the terminal requests (on-demand). If there is no traffic of the terminal dedicated bearer is released. The terminal or the network may generate a plurality of dedicated bearers as needed.
단말이 어떠한 서비스를 이용하는지에 따라 IP flow는 다른 QoS 특성을 가질 수 있다. 네트워크는 단말을 위한 EPS session을 확립/변경(establish/modification) 시 네트워크 자원의 할당 내지 QoS 에 대한 제어 정책을 결정하여 EPS session이 유지되는 동안 이를 적용한다. 이를 PCC (Policy and Charging Control)라 한다. PCC 규칙(PCC rule)은 오퍼레이터 정책(예를 들어, QoS 정책, 게이트 상태(gate status), 과금 방법 등)을 기반으로 결정된다.The IP flow may have different QoS characteristics depending on what service the UE uses. The network determines the allocation of network resources or a control policy for QoS at the time of establishing / modifying an EPS session for the terminal and applies it while the EPS session is maintained. This is called PCC (Policy and Charging Control). PCC rules are determined based on operator policy (eg, QoS policy, gate status, charging method, etc.).
PCC 규칙은 SDF 단위로 결정된다. 즉, 단말이 이용하는 서비스에 따라 IP flow는 다른 QoS 특성을 가질 수 있으며, 동일한 QoS를 가진 IP flow들은 동일한 SDF로 맵핑되고, SDF는 PCC 규칙을 적용하는 단위가 된다. PCC rules are determined in units of SDF. That is, the IP flow may have different QoS characteristics according to the service used by the terminal, IP flows having the same QoS are mapped to the same SDF, and the SDF becomes a unit for applying the PCC rule.
이와 같은 PCC 기능을 수행하는 주요 엔터티로 PCRF(Policy and Charging Control Function)와 PCEF(Policy and Charging Enforcement Function)가 이에 해당될 수 있다. The main entities for performing such a PCC function may be Policy and Charging Control Function (PCRF) and Policy and Charging Enforcement Function (PCEF).
PCRF는 EPS session을 생성 또는 변경할 때 SDF 별로 대해 PCC 규칙을 결정하여 P-GW(또는 PCEF)로 제공한다. P-GW는 해당 SDF에 대해 PCC 규칙을 설정한 뒤, 송/수신되는 IP 패킷마다 SDF를 검출하여 해당 SDF에 대한 PCC 규칙을 적용한다. SDF가 EPS을 거쳐 단말에게 전송될 때 P-GW에 저장되어 있는 QoS 규칙에 따라 적합한 QoS를 제공해 줄 수 있는 EPS bearer로 맵핑된다. PCRF determines PCC rules for each SDF when creating or changing EPS sessions and provides them to the P-GW (or PCEF). After setting the PCC rule for the SDF, the P-GW detects the SDF for each IP packet transmitted and received and applies the PCC rule for the SDF. When the SDF is transmitted to the terminal via the EPS, it is mapped to an EPS bearer capable of providing a suitable QoS according to the QoS rules stored in the P-GW.
PCC 규칙은 동적 PCC 규칙(dynamic PCC rule)과 미리 정의된 PCC 규칙(pre-defined PCC rule)으로 구분된다. 동적 PCC 규칙은 EPS session 확립/변경(establish/modification) 시 PCRF에서 P-GW로 동적으로 제공된다. 반면, 미리 정의된 PCC 규칙은 P-GW에 미리 설정되어 있어 PCRF에 의해 활성화/비활성화된다.PCC rules are divided into dynamic PCC rules and pre-defined PCC rules. Dynamic PCC rules are provided dynamically from PCRF to P-GW upon EPS session establishment / modification. On the other hand, the predefined PCC rule is preset in the P-GW and activated / deactivated by the PCRF.
EPS 베어러는 기본 QoS 파라미터로 QoS 클래스 식별자(QCI: QoS Class Identifier)와 할당 및 보유 우선 순위(ARP: Allocation and Retention Priority)를 포함한다. The EPS bearer includes a QoS Class Identifier (QCI) and Allocation and Retention Priority (ARP) as basic QoS parameters.
QCI는 bearer 레벨 패킷 포워딩 처리(treatment)를 제어하는 노드-특정(node-specific) 파라미터들에 접근하기 위한 기준으로 사용되는 스칼라(scalar)로서, 스칼라 값은 네트워크 오퍼레이터에 의하여 미리 설정(pre-configured)되어 있다. 예를 들어, 스칼라는 정수값 1 내지 9 중 어느 하나로 미리 설정될 수 있다. QCI is a scalar that is used as a reference to access node-specific parameters that control bearer level packet forwarding treatment, and the scalar value is pre-configured by the network operator. ) For example, a scalar may be preset to any one of integer values 1-9.
ARP의 주된 목적은 자원이 제한되는 경우, bearer의 establishment 또는 modification 요청이 받아들여질 수 있는지 또는 거절되어야 하는지 결정하기 위함이다. 또한, ARP는 예외적인 자원 제한(예를 들어, 핸드오버 등) 상황에서, eNB에 의해 어떠한 bearer(s)를 드랍(drop)할 지 결정하는데 사용될 수 있다. The main purpose of ARP is to determine if a bearer's establishment or modification request can be accepted or rejected if resources are limited. In addition, ARP can be used to determine which bearer (s) to drop by the eNB in exceptional resource constraints (eg, handover, etc.).
EPS bearer는 QCI 자원 형태에 따라 보장된 비트율(GBR: Guaranteed Bit Rate)형 bearer와 비 보장된 비트율(non-GBR) 형 bearer로 구분된다. Default bearer는 항상 non-GBR 형 bearer이고, dedicated bearer는 GBR형 또는 non-GBR형 bearer일 수 있다. The EPS bearer is classified into a guaranteed bit rate (GBR) type bearer and a non-guaranteed bit rate (non-GBR) type bearer according to the QCI resource type. The default bearer may always be a non-GBR type bearer, and the dedicated bearer may be a GBR type or non-GBR type bearer.
GBR 형 베어러는 QCI와 ARP 외에 QoS 파라미터로서 GBR과 최대 비트율(MBR: Maximum Bit Rate)를 가진다. MBR은 bearer별로 고정된 자원을 할당(대역폭 보장) 받는 것을 의미한다. 반면, non-GBR형 bearer는 QCI와 ARP 이외에 QoS 파라미터로서 결합된 MBR(AMBR: Aggregated MBR)을 가진다. AMBR은 자원을 bearer 별로 할당 받지 못하는 대신 다른 non-GBR형 bearer들과 같이 사용할 수 있는 최대 대역폭을 할당 받는 것을 의미한다. GBR bearer has GBR and Maximum Bit Rate (MBR) as QoS parameters in addition to QCI and ARP. MBR means that fixed resources are allocated to each bearer (bandwidth guarantee). On the other hand, the non-GBR bearer has an MBR (AMBR: Aggregated MBR) combined as a QoS parameter in addition to QCI and ARP. AMBR means that resources are not allocated for each bearer, but the maximum bandwidth that can be used like other non-GBR bearers is allocated.
위와 같이 EPS bearer의 QoS가 정해지면, 각 인터페이스마다 각각의 bearer의 QoS가 정해진다. 각 인터페이스의 bearer는 EPS bearer의 QoS를 인터페이스 별로 제공하므로, EPS bearer와 RB, S1 bearer 등은 모두 일대일 관계를 가진다. If the QoS of the EPS bearer is determined as above, the QoS of each bearer is determined for each interface. Since the bearer of each interface provides QoS of the EPS bearer for each interface, the EPS bearer, the RB, and the S1 bearer all have a one-to-one relationship.
단말이 default bearer를 통해 서비스를 이용하는 중에, default bearer만으로 QoS를 제공 받기 불충분한 서비스를 이용하게 되면 단말의 요청에 의해(on-demand)로 dedicated bearer가 생성된다.While the terminal uses the service through the default bearer, if the service is insufficient to receive the QoS provided only by the default bearer, a dedicated bearer is generated on-demand.
도 9는 본 발명의 적용될 수 있는 무선 통신 시스템에서 EMM 등록 상태에서 제어 평면(control plane) 및 사용자 평면(user plane)의 전송 경로를 예시하는 도면이다. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a transmission path of a control plane and a user plane in an EMM registered state in a wireless communication system to which the present invention can be applied.
도 9(a)는 ECM-CONNECTED 상태를 예시하고, 도 9(b)는 ECM-IDLE를 예시한다. 9 (a) illustrates the ECM-CONNECTED state, and FIG. 9 (b) illustrates the ECM-IDLE.
단말이 네트워크에 성공적으로 어태치(attach)하여 EMM-Registered 상태가 되면 EPS 베어러를 이용하여 서비스를 제공받는다. 상술한 바와 같이, EPS 베어러는 구간 별로 DRB, S1 베어러, S5 베어러로 나뉘어져 구성된다.When the terminal successfully attaches to the network and becomes the EMM-Registered state, the terminal receives the service using the EPS bearer. As described above, the EPS bearer is configured by divided into DRB, S1 bearer, S5 bearer for each interval.
도 9(a)와 같이, 사용자 트래픽이 있는 ECM-CONNECTED 상태에서는 NAS 시그널링 연결 즉, ECM 연결(즉, RRC 연결과 S1 시그널링 연결)이 설정된다. 또한, MME와 SGW 간에 S11 GTP-C(GPRS Tunneling Protocol Control Plane) 연결이 설정되고, SGW와 PDN GW 간에 S5 GTP-C 연결이 설정된다.As illustrated in FIG. 9A, in the ECM-CONNECTED state in which user traffic is present, a NAS signaling connection, that is, an ECM connection (that is, an RRC connection and an S1 signaling connection) is established. In addition, an S11 GTP-C (GPRS Tunneling Protocol Control Plane) connection is established between the MME and the SGW, and an S5 GTP-C connection is established between the SGW and the PDN GW.
또한, ECM-CONNECTED 상태에서는 DRB, S1 베어러 및 S5 베어러가 모두 설정(즉, 무선 또는 네트워크 자원 할당)된다. In addition, in the ECM-CONNECTED state, the DRB, S1 bearer, and S5 bearer are all configured (ie, radio or network resource allocation).
도 9(b)와 같이, 사용자 트래픽이 없는 ECM-IDLE 상태에서는 ECM 연결(즉, RRC 연결과 S1 시그널링 연결)은 해제된다. 다만, MME와 SGW 간의 S11 GTP-C 연결 및 SGW와 PDN GW 간의 S5 GTP-C 연결은 설정이 유지된다.As shown in FIG. 9B, in the ECM-IDLE state in which there is no user traffic, the ECM connection (that is, the RRC connection and the S1 signaling connection) is released. However, the S11 GTP-C connection between the MME and the SGW and the S5 GTP-C connection between the SGW and the PDN GW are maintained.
또한, ECM-IDLE 상태에서는 DRB와 S1 베어러는 모두 해제되나, S5 베어러는 설정(즉, 무선 또는 네트워크 자원 할당)을 유지한다. In addition, in the ECM-IDLE state, both the DRB and the S1 bearer are released, but the S5 bearer maintains the configuration (ie, radio or network resource allocation).
랜덤 액세스 절차(Random Access Procedure)Random Access Procedure
이하에서는 LTE/LTE-A 시스템에서 제공하는 랜덤 액세스 절차(random access procedure)에 대해 살펴본다. Hereinafter, a random access procedure provided by the LTE / LTE-A system will be described.
랜덤 액세스 절차는 단말이 기지국과 상향링크 동기를 얻거나 상향링크 무선 자원을 할당 받기 위해 사용된다. 단말의 전원이 켜진 후, 단말은 초기 셀과의 하향링크 동기를 획득하고 시스템 정보를 수신한다. 시스템 정보로부터 사용 가능한 랜덤 액세스 프리앰블(random access preamble)의 집합과 랜덤 액세스 프리앰블의 전송에 사용되는 무선 자원에 관한 정보를 얻는다. 랜덤 액세스 프리앰블의 전송에 사용되는 무선 자원은 적어도 하나 이상의 서브프레임 인덱스와 주파수 영역 상의 인덱스의 조합으로 특정될 수 있다. 단말은 랜덤 액세스 프리앰블의 집합으로부터 임의로 선택한 랜덤 액세스 프리앰블을 전송하고, 상기 랜덤 액세스 프리앰블을 수신한 기지국은 상향링크 동기를 위한 타이밍 정렬(TA: timing alignment) 값을 랜덤 액세스 응답을 통해 단말로 보낸다. 이로써 단말은 상향링크 동기를 획득하는 것이다.The random access procedure is used for the terminal to obtain uplink synchronization with the base station or to receive uplink radio resources. After the terminal is powered on, the terminal acquires downlink synchronization with the initial cell and receives system information. From the system information, a set of available random access preambles and information about radio resources used for transmission of the random access preambles are obtained. The radio resource used for the transmission of the random access preamble may be specified by a combination of at least one subframe index and an index on the frequency domain. The terminal transmits a random access preamble selected randomly from the set of random access preambles, and the base station receiving the random access preamble sends a timing alignment (TA) value for uplink synchronization to the terminal through a random access response. As a result, the terminal acquires uplink synchronization.
랜덤 액세스 절차는 FDD(frequency division duplex)와 TDD(time division duplex)에서 공통적인 절차이다. 랜덤 액세스 절차는 셀 사이즈에 무관하며, 캐리어 병합(CA: carrier aggregation)이 설정된 경우 서빙 셀(serving cell)의 개수와도 무관하다. The random access procedure is a common procedure in frequency division duplex (FDD) and time division duplex (TDD). The random access procedure is irrelevant to the cell size, and is independent of the number of serving cells when carrier aggregation (CA) is configured.
먼저, 단말이 랜덤 액세스 절차를 수행하는 경우로는 다음과 같은 경우가 있다.First, a case where the UE performs a random access procedure may be as follows.
- 단말이 기지국과의 RRC 연결(RRC Connection)이 없어, RRC 아이들 상태에서 초기 접속 (initial access)을 수행하는 경우When the terminal performs an initial access in the RRC idle state because there is no RRC connection with the base station
- RRC 연결 재-확립 절차(RRC connection re-establishment procedure)를 수행하는 경우When performing the RRC connection re-establishment procedure
- 단말이 핸드오버 과정에서, 타겟(target) 셀로 처음 접속하는 경우When the UE first accesses the target cell during the handover process
- 기지국의 명령에 의해 랜덤 액세스 절차가 요청되는 경우When the random access procedure is requested by the command of the base station
- RRC 연결 상태 중, 상향링크 시간 동기가 맞지 않은 상황에서(non-synchronized) 하향링크로 전송될 데이터가 발생하는 경우In case of data to be transmitted in downlink during non-synchronized uplink time synchronization during RRC connection state
- RRC 연결 상태 중, 상향링크의 시간 동기가 맞지 않거나(non-synchronized), 무선자원을 요청하기 위해 사용되는 지정된 무선자원이 할당되지 않은 상황에서, 상향링크로 전송할 데이터가 발생하는 경우When there is data to be transmitted on the uplink in a situation in which the uplink time synchronization is not synchronized (non-synchronized) during the RRC connection state or when a designated radio resource used for requesting a radio resource is not allocated.
- RRC 연결 상태 중, 타이밍 어드밴스(timing advance)가 필요한 상황에서 단말의 위치 결정(positioning)을 수행하는 경우In the case of performing positioning of the UE in a situation in which timing advance is needed during the RRC connection state
- 무선 연결 실패(radio link failure) 또는 핸드오버 실패(handover failure) 시 복구 과정을 수행하는 경우When performing recovery process in case of radio link failure or handover failure
3GPP Rel-10에서는 캐리어 병합을 지원하는 무선 접속 시스템에서 하나의 특정 셀(예를 들어, P셀)에 적용 가능한 TA(timing advance) 값을 복수의 셀에 공통으로 적용하는 것을 고려하였다. 다만, 단말이 서로 다른 주파수 밴드에 속한(즉, 주파수 상에서 크게 이격된) 복수의 셀들 혹은 전파(propagation) 특성이 다른 복수의 셀들을 병합할 수 있다. 또한 특정 셀의 경우 커버리지 확대 혹은 커버리지 홀의 제거를 위해 RRH(remote radio header)(즉, 리피터), 펨토 셀(femto cell) 혹은 피코 셀(pico cell) 등과 같은 스몰 셀(small cell) 또는 세컨더리 기지국(SeNB: secondary eNB)이 셀 내에 배치되는 상황에서 단말은 하나의 셀을 통해 기지국(즉, 매크로 기지국(macro eNB))과 통신을 수행하고, 다른 셀을 통해 세컨더리 기지국과 통신을 수행하는 경우 복수의 셀들이 서로 다른 전파 지연 특성을 가지게 될 수 있다. 이 경우, 하나의 TA 값을 복수의 셀들에 공통으로 적용하는 방식으로 사용하는 상향링크 전송을 수행할 경우 복수의 셀들 상에서 전송되는 상향링크 신호의 동기에 심각한 영향을 끼칠 수 있다. 따라서, 복수의 셀들이 병합된 CA 상황에서 복수의 TA를 가지는 것이 바람직할 수 있으며, 3GPP Rel-11에서는 다중 TA(multiple TA)를 지원하기 위하여 특정 셀 그룹 단위로 TA를 독립적으로 할당하는 것을 고려한다. 이를 TA 그룹(TAG: TA group)이라 하며, TAG는 하나 이상의 셀들을 포함할 수 있으며, TAG 내 포함된 하나 이상의 셀에는 동일한 TA가 공통적으로 적용될 수 있다. 이러한 다중 TA를 지원하기 위하여, MAC TA 명령 제어 요소(element)는 2 비트의 TAG 식별자(TAG ID)와 6 비트의 TA 명령 필드로 구성된다.In 3GPP Rel-10, a common consideration is to apply a timing advance (TA) value applicable to one specific cell (eg, a Pcell) to a plurality of cells in a wireless access system supporting carrier aggregation. However, the UE may merge a plurality of cells belonging to different frequency bands (that is, largely spaced on the frequency) or a plurality of cells having different propagation characteristics. In addition, in the case of a specific cell, a small cell or a secondary base station such as a remote radio header (RRH) (ie, a repeater), a femto cell, or a pico cell may be used to expand coverage or remove coverage holes. In a situation where a secondary eNB (SeNB: secondary eNB) is disposed in a cell, the terminal communicates with a base station (ie, macro eNB) through one cell, and when communicating with a secondary base station through another cell, Cells may have different propagation delay characteristics. In this case, when uplink transmission using one TA value in a common manner may be seriously affected in synchronization of uplink signals transmitted on a plurality of cells. Therefore, it may be desirable to have a plurality of TAs in a CA situation in which a plurality of cells are merged. In 3GPP Rel-11, it is considered that an TA is independently allocated to a specific cell group unit to support multiple TAs. do. This is called a TA group (TAG: TA group). The TAG may include one or more cells, and the same TA may be commonly applied to one or more cells included in the TAG. In order to support such multiple TAs, a MAC TA command control element is composed of a 2-bit TAG identifier (TAG ID) and a 6-bit TA command field.
캐리어 병합이 설정된 단말은 P셀과 관련되어 앞서 설명한 랜덤 액세스 절차를 수행하는 경우가 발생되면 랜덤 액세스 절차를 수행하게 된다. P셀이 속한 TAG(즉, pTAG: primary TAG)의 경우, 기존과 동일하게 P셀을 기준으로 결정되는, 혹은 P셀에 수반되는 랜덤 액세스 절차를 통해 조정되는 TA를 pTAG 내 모든 셀(들)에 적용할 수 있다. 반면, S셀로만 구성되는 TAG(즉, sTAG: secondary TAG)의 경우, sTAG 내 특정 S셀을 기준으로 결정되는 TA는 해당 sTAG 내 모든 셀(들)에 적용할 수 있으며, 이 때 TA는 기지국에 의해 개시되 랜덤 액세스 절차에 의해 획득될 수 있다. 구체적으로, sTAG 내에서 S셀은 RACH 자원으로 설정되고, 기지국은 TA를 결정하기 위하여 S셀에서 RACH 접속을 요청한다. 즉, 기지국은 P셀에서 전송되는 PDCCH 오더에 의해 S셀들 상에서 RACH 전송을 개시시킨다. S셀 프리앰블에 대한 응답 메시지는 RA-RNTI를 사용하여 P셀을 통해 전송된다. 단말은 랜덤 액세스를 성공적으로 마친 S셀을 기준으로 결정되는 TA는 해당 sTAG 내 모든 셀(들)에 적용할 수 있다. 이와 같이, 랜덤 액세스 절차는 S셀에서도 해당 S셀이 속한 sTAG의 타이밍 정렬(timing alignment)을 획득하기 위하여 S셀에서도 수행될 수 있다. When the UE for which carrier aggregation is configured performs the random access procedure described above with respect to the PCell, the UE performs the random access procedure. In the case of a TAG (ie, a pTAG: primary TAG) to which a Pcell belongs, all cell (s) in the pTAG are replaced with a TA determined based on the Pcell or adjusted through a random access procedure accompanying the Pcell. Applicable to On the other hand, in the case of a TAG (ie, sTAG: secondary TAG) composed only of S cells, a TA determined based on a specific S cell in the sTAG may be applied to all cell (s) in the sTAG, where TA is a base station. Can be obtained by a random access procedure. Specifically, in the sTAG, the SCell is configured as an RACH resource, and the base station requests an RACH access from the SCell to determine the TA. That is, the base station initiates the RACH transmission on the S cells by the PDCCH order transmitted in the P cell. The response message for the SCell preamble is transmitted through the Pcell using the RA-RNTI. The UE may apply the TA determined based on the SCell that has successfully completed the random access to all cell (s) in the corresponding sTAG. As such, the random access procedure may be performed in the SCell to obtain a timing alignment of the sTAG to which the SCell belongs.
LTE/LTE-A 시스템에서는 랜덤 액세스 프리앰블(random access preamble, RACH preamble)을 선택하는 과정에서, 특정한 집합 안에서 단말이 임의로 하나의 프리앰블을 선택하여 사용하는 경쟁 기반 랜덤 액세스 절차(contention based random access procedure)과 기지국이 특정 단말에게만 할당해준 랜덤 액세스 프리앰블을 사용하는 비 경쟁 기반 랜덤 액세스 절차(non-contention based random access procedure)을 모두 제공한다. 다만, 비 경쟁 기반 랜덤 액세스 절차는, 상술한 핸드오버 과정, 기지국의 명령에 의해 요청되는 경우, 단말 위치 결정(positioning) 및/또는 sTAG을 위한 타이밍 어드밴스 정렬에 한하여 사용될 수 있다. 랜덤 액세스 절차가 완료된 후에 일반적인 상향링크/하향링크 전송이 발생된다.In the LTE / LTE-A system, in the process of selecting a random access preamble (RACH preamble), a contention-based random access procedure in which the UE randomly selects and uses one preamble within a specific set And a non-contention based random access procedure using a random access preamble allocated by a base station only to a specific terminal. However, the non- contention based random access procedure may be used only for the terminal positioning and / or the timing advance alignment for the sTAG when requested by the above-described handover procedure, a command of the base station. After the random access procedure is completed, general uplink / downlink transmission occurs.
한편, 릴레이 노드(RN: relay node) 또한 경쟁 기반 랜덤 액세스 절차와 비 경쟁 기반 랜덤 액세스 절차를 모두 지원한다. 릴레이 노드가 랜덤 액세스 절차를 수행할 때, 그 시점에서 RN 서브프레임 구성(configuration)을 중단시킨다(suspend). 즉, 이는 일시적으로 RN 서브프레임 구성을 폐기하는 것으로 의미한다. 이후, 성공적으로 랜덤 액세스 절차가 완료되는 시점에서 RN 서브프레임 구성이 재개된다. Meanwhile, a relay node (RN) also supports both a contention-based random access procedure and a contention-free random access procedure. When the relay node performs a random access procedure, it suspends the RN subframe configuration at that point. In other words, this means temporarily discarding the RN subframe configuration. Thereafter, the RN subframe configuration is resumed when the random access procedure is completed successfully.
도 10은 본 발명이 적용될 수 있는 무선 통신 시스템에서 경쟁 기반 랜덤 액세스 절차를 설명하기 위한 도면이다.10 is a diagram for explaining a contention based random access procedure in a wireless communication system to which the present invention can be applied.
(1) 제1 메시지(Msg 1, message 1)(1) first message (
먼저, 단말은 시스템 정보(system information) 또는 핸드오버 명령(handover command)을 통해 지시된 랜덤 액세스 프리앰블의 집합에서 임의로(randomly) 하나의 랜덤 액세스 프리앰블(random access preamble, RACH preamble)을 선택하고, 상기 랜덤 액세스 프리앰블을 전송할 수 있는 PRACH(physical RACH) 자원을 선택하여 전송한다. First, the UE randomly selects one random access preamble (RACH preamble) from a set of random access preambles indicated through system information or a handover command, and A physical RACH (PRACH) resource capable of transmitting a random access preamble is selected and transmitted.
랜덤 액세스 프리앰블은 RACH 전송 채널에서 6비트로 전송되고, 6비트는 RACH 전송한 단말을 식별하기 위한 5비트의 임의 식별자(radom identity)와, 추가 정보를 나타내기 위한 1비트(예를 들어, 제3 메시지(Msg 3)의 크기를 지시)로 구성된다. The random access preamble is transmitted in 6 bits in the RACH transmission channel, and the 6 bits are 5 bits of a random identity for identifying the UE transmitting the RACH, and 1 bit (eg, a third for indicating additional information). Message (indicating the size of Msg 3).
단말로부터 랜덤 액세스 프리엠블을 수신한 기지국은 프리앰블을 디코딩하고, RA-RNTI를 획득한다. 랜덤 액세스 프리앰블이 전송된 PRACH와 관련된 RA-RNTI는 해당 단말이 전송한 랜덤 액세스 프리앰블의 시간-주파수 자원에 따라 결정된다.The base station receiving the random access preamble from the terminal decodes the preamble and obtains an RA-RNTI. The RA-RNTI associated with the PRACH in which the random access preamble is transmitted is determined according to the time-frequency resource of the random access preamble transmitted by the corresponding UE.
(2) 제2 메시지(Msg 2, message 2)(2) a second message (
기지국은 제1 메시지 상의 프리앰블을 통해서 획득한 RA-RNTI로 지시(address)되는 랜덤 액세스 응답(random access response)을 단말로 전송한다. 랜덤 액세스 응답에는 랜덤 액세스 프리앰블 구분자/식별자(RA preamble index/identifier), 상향링크 무선자원을 알려주는 상향링크 승인(UL grant), 임시 셀 식별자(TC-RNTI: Temporary C-RNTI) 그리고 시간 동기 값(TAC: time alignment command)들이 포함될 수 있다. TAC는 기지국이 단말에게 상향링크 시간 정렬(time alignment)을 유지하기 위해 보내는 시간 동기 값을 지시하는 정보이다. 단말은 상기 시간 동기 값을 이용하여, 상향링크 전송 타이밍을 갱신한다. 단말이 시간 동기를 갱신하면, 시간 동기 타이머(time alignment timer)를 개시 또는 재시작한다. UL grant는 후술하는 스케줄링 메시지(제3 메시지)의 전송에 사용되는 상향링크 자원 할당 및 TPC(transmit power command)를 포함한다. TPC는 스케줄링된 PUSCH를 위한 전송 파워의 결정에 사용된다.The base station transmits a random access response addressed to the RA-RNTI obtained through the preamble on the first message to the terminal. The random access response includes a random access preamble index / identifier (UL preamble index / identifier), an UL grant indicating an uplink radio resource, a temporary cell identifier (TC-RNTI), and a time synchronization value. (TAC: time alignment commands) may be included. The TAC is information indicating a time synchronization value that the base station sends to the terminal to maintain uplink time alignment. The terminal updates the uplink transmission timing by using the time synchronization value. When the terminal updates the time synchronization, a time alignment timer is started or restarted. The UL grant includes an uplink resource allocation and a transmit power command (TPC) used for transmission of a scheduling message (third message), which will be described later. TPC is used to determine the transmit power for the scheduled PUSCH.
단말은 랜덤 액세스 프리앰블을 전송 후에, 기지국이 시스템 정보 또는 핸드오버 명령을 통해 지시된 랜덤 액세스 응답 윈도우(random access response window) 내에서 자신의 랜덤 액세스 응답(random access response)의 수신을 시도하며, PRACH에 대응되는 RA-RNTI로 마스킹된 PDCCH를 검출하고, 검출된 PDCCH에 의해 지시되는 PDSCH를 수신하게 된다. 랜덤 액세스 응답 정보는 MAC PDU(MAC packet data unit)의 형식으로 전송될 수 있으며, 상기 MAC PDU는 PDSCH을 통해 전달될 수 있다. PDCCH에는 상기 PDSCH를 수신해야 하는 단말의 정보와, 상기 PDSCH의 무선 자원의 주파수 그리고 시간 정보, 그리고 상기 PDSCH의 전송 형식 등이 포함되어 있는 것이 바람직하다. 상술한 바와 같이, 일단 단말이 자신에게 전송되는 PDCCH의 검출에 성공하면, 상기 PDCCH의 정보들에 따라 PDSCH로 전송되는 랜덤 액세스 응답을 적절히 수신할 수 있다.After the UE transmits the random access preamble, the base station attempts to receive its random access response within the random access response window indicated by the system information or the handover command, and PRACH The PDCCH masked by the RA-RNTI corresponding to the PDCCH is detected, and the PDSCH indicated by the detected PDCCH is received. The random access response information may be transmitted in the form of a MAC packet data unit (MAC PDU), and the MAC PDU may be transmitted through a PDSCH. The PDCCH preferably includes information of a terminal that should receive the PDSCH, frequency and time information of a radio resource of the PDSCH, a transmission format of the PDSCH, and the like. As described above, once the UE successfully detects the PDCCH transmitted to the UE, the UE can properly receive the random access response transmitted to the PDSCH according to the information of the PDCCH.
랜덤 액세스 응답 윈도우는 프리앰블을 전송한 단말이 랜덤 액세스 응답 메시지를 수신하기 위해서 대기하는 최대 시구간을 의미한다. 랜덤 액세스 응답 윈도우는 프리앰블이 전송되는 마지막 서브프레임에서 3개의 서브프레임 이후의 서브프레임으로부터 시작하여 'ra-ResponseWindowSize'의 길이를 가진다. 즉, 단말은 프리앰블을 전송이 종료된 서브프레임으로부터 3개의 서브프레임 이후부터 확보한 랜덤 액세스 윈도우 동안 랜덤 액세스 응답을 수신하기 위해 대기한다. 단말은 시스템 정보(system information)을 통해 랜덤 액세스 윈도우 사이즈('ra-ResponseWindowsize') 파라미터 값을 획득할 수 있으며, 랜덤 액세스 윈도우 사이즈는 2부터 10 사이의 값으로 결정될 수 있다.The random access response window refers to a maximum time period in which a terminal that transmits a preamble waits to receive a random access response message. The random access response window has a length of 'ra-ResponseWindowSize' starting from subframes after three subframes in the last subframe in which the preamble is transmitted. That is, the UE waits to receive a random access response during the random access window obtained after three subframes from the subframe in which the preamble is terminated. The terminal may acquire a random access window size ('ra-ResponseWindowsize') parameter value through system information, and the random access window size may be determined as a value between 2 and 10.
단말은 기지국에 전송하였던 랜덤 액세스 프리앰블과 동일한 랜덤 액세스 프리앰블 구분자/식별자를 가지는 랜덤 액세스 응답을 성공적으로 수신하면, 랜덤 액세스 응답의 모니터링을 중지한다. 반면, 랜덤 액세스 응답 윈도우가 종료될 때까지 랜덤 액세스 응답 메시지를 수신하지 못하거나, 기지국에 전송하였던 랜덤 액세스 프리앰블과 동일한 랜덤 액세스 프리앰블 구분자를 가지는 유효한 랜덤 액세스 응답을 수신하지 못한 경우 랜덤 액세스 응답의 수신은 실패하였다고 간주되고, 이후 단말은 프리앰블 재전송을 수행할 수 있다.If the terminal successfully receives a random access response having the same random access preamble identifier / identifier as the random access preamble transmitted to the base station, the monitoring stops the random access response. On the other hand, if the random access response message is not received until the random access response window ends, or if a valid random access response having the same random access preamble identifier as the random access preamble transmitted to the base station is not received, the random access response is received. Is considered to have failed, and then the UE may perform preamble retransmission.
상술한 바와 같이 랜덤 액세스 응답에서 랜덤 액세스 프리앰블 구분자가 필요한 이유는, 하나의 랜덤 액세스 응답에는 하나 이상의 단말들을 위한 랜덤 액세스 응답 정보가 포함될 수 있기 때문에, 상기 UL grant, TC-RNTI 그리고 TAC가 어느 단말에게 유효한지를 알려주기 위는 것이 필요하기 때문이다. As described above, the reason why the random access preamble identifier is needed in the random access response is that the UL grant, the TC-RNTI, and the TAC are used by any terminal because one random access response may include random access response information for one or more terminals. This is because we need to know if it is valid.
(3) 제3 메시지(Msg 3, message 3)(3) third message (
단말이 자신에게 유효한 랜덤 액세스 응답을 수신한 경우에는, 상기 랜덤 액세스 응답에 포함된 정보들을 각각 처리한다. 즉, 단말은 TAC을 적용시키고, TC-RNTI를 저장한다. 또한, UL grant를 이용하여, 단말의 버퍼에 저장된 데이터 또는 새롭게 생성된 데이터를 기지국으로 전송한다. 단말의 최초 접속의 경우, RRC 계층에서 생성되어 CCCH를 통해 전달된 RRC 연결 요청이 제3 메시지에 포함되어 전송될 수 있으며, RRC 연결 재확립 절차의 경우 RRC 계층에서 생성되어 CCCH를 통해 전달된 RRC 연결 재확립 요청이 제3 메시지에 포함되어 전송될 수 있다. 또한, NAS 접속 요청 메시지를 포함할 수도 있다. When the terminal receives a valid random access response to the terminal, it processes each of the information included in the random access response. That is, the terminal applies the TAC, and stores the TC-RNTI. In addition, by using the UL grant, the data stored in the buffer of the terminal or newly generated data is transmitted to the base station. In the case of initial access of the UE, an RRC connection request generated in the RRC layer and delivered through the CCCH may be included in the third message and transmitted, and in the case of an RRC connection reestablishment procedure, an RRC generated in the RRC layer and delivered through the CCCH The connection reestablishment request may be included in the third message and transmitted. It may also include a NAS connection request message.
제3 메시지는 단말의 식별자가 포함되어야 한다. 경쟁 기반 랜덤 액세스 절차에서는 기지국에서 어떠한 단말들이 상기 랜덤 액세스 절차를 수행하는지 판단할 수 없는데, 차후에 충돌 해결을 하기 위해서는 단말을 식별해야 하기 때문이다. The third message should include the identifier of the terminal. In the contention-based random access procedure, it is not possible to determine which terminals perform the random access procedure in the base station, because the terminal needs to be identified for future collision resolution.
단말의 식별자를 포함시키는 방법으로는 두 가지 방법이 존재한다. 첫 번째 방법은 단말이 상기 랜덤 액세스 절차 이전에 이미 해당 셀에서 할당 받은 유효한 셀 식별자(C-RNTI)를 가지고 있었다면, 단말은 상기 UL grant에 대응하는 상향링크 전송 신호를 통해 자신의 셀 식별자를 전송한다. 반면에, 만약 랜덤 액세스 절차 이전에 유효한 셀 식별자를 할당 받지 못하였다면, 단말은 자신의 고유 식별자(예를 들면, S-TMSI 또는 임의 값(random number))를 포함하여 전송한다. 일반적으로 상기의 고유 식별자는 C-RNTI보다 길다. UL-SCH 상의 전송에서는 단말 특정 스크램블링이 사용된다. 다만, 단말이 아직 C-RNTI를 할당받지 못한 경우라면, 스크램블링은 C-RNTI에 기반할 수 없으며 대신 랜덤 액세스 응답에서 수신한 TC-RNTI가 사용된다. 단말은 상기 UL grant에 대응하는 데이터를 전송하였다면, 충돌 해결을 위한 타이머(contention resolution timer)를 개시한다. There are two methods for including the identifier of the terminal. In the first method, if the UE has a valid cell identifier (C-RNTI) allocated in the corresponding cell before the random access procedure, the UE transmits its cell identifier through an uplink transmission signal corresponding to the UL grant. do. On the other hand, if a valid cell identifier has not been allocated before the random access procedure, the UE transmits its own unique identifier (eg, S-TMSI or random number). In general, the unique identifier is longer than the C-RNTI. Terminal specific scrambling is used for transmission on the UL-SCH. However, if the terminal has not yet been assigned a C-RNTI, scrambling cannot be based on the C-RNTI, and the TC-RNTI received in the random access response is used instead. If the UE transmits data corresponding to the UL grant, it starts a timer for contention resolution (contention resolution timer).
(4) 제4 메시지(Msg 4, message 4)(4) Fourth message (
기지국은 단말로부터 제3 메시지를 통해 해당 단말의 C-RNTI를 수신한 경우 수신한 C-RNTI를 이용하여 단말에게 제4 메시지를 전송한다. 반면, 단말로부터 제3 메시지를 통해 상기 고유 식별자(즉, S-TMSI 또는 임의 값(random number))를 수신한 경우, 랜덤 액세스 응답에서 해당 단말에게 할당한 TC-RNTI를 이용하여 제4 메시지를 단말에게 전송한다. 여기서, 제4 메시지는 C-RNTI를 포함하는 RRC 연결 설정 메시지(RRC connection setup)가 해당될 수 있다. When the base station receives the C-RNTI of the terminal through the third message from the terminal, the base station transmits a fourth message to the terminal using the received C-RNTI. On the other hand, when the unique identifier (ie, S-TMSI or random number) is received from the terminal through the third message, the fourth message is transmitted using the TC-RNTI allocated to the terminal in the random access response. Send to the terminal. Here, the fourth message may correspond to an RRC connection setup message including a C-RNTI.
단말은 랜덤 액세스 응답에 포함된 UL grant를 통해 자신의 식별자를 포함한 데이터를 전송한 이후, 충돌 해결을 위해 기지국의 지시를 기다린다. 즉, 특정 메시지를 수신하기 위해 PDCCH의 수신을 시도한다. 상기 PDCCH를 수신하는 방법에 있어서도 두 가지 방법이 존재한다. 앞에서 언급한 바와 같이 상기 UL grant에 대응하여 전송된 제3 메시지가 자신의 식별자가 C-RNTI인 경우, 자신의 C-RNTI를 이용하여 PDCCH의 수신을 시도하고, 상기 식별자가 고유 식별자(즉, S-TMSI 또는 임의 값(random number))인 경우에는, 랜덤 액세스 응답에 포함된 TC-RNTI를 이용하여 PDCCH의 수신을 시도한다. 그 후, 전자의 경우, 만약 상기 충돌 해결 타이머가 만료되기 전에 자신의 C-RNTI를 통해 PDCCH를 수신한 경우에, 단말은 정상적으로 랜덤 액세스 절차가 수행되었다고 판단하고, 랜덤 액세스 절차를 종료한다. 후자의 경우에는 상기 충돌 해결 타이머가 만료되기 전에 TC-RNTI를 통해 PDCCH를 수신하였다면, 상기 PDCCH가 지시하는 PDSCH이 전달하는 데이터를 확인한다. 만약 상기 데이터의 내용에 자신의 고유 식별자가 포함되어 있다면, 단말은 정상적으로 랜덤 액세스 절차가 수행되었다고 판단하고, 랜덤 액세스 절차를 종료한다. 제4 메시지를 통해 단말은 C-RNTI를 획득하고, 이후 단말과 네트워크는 C-RNTI를 이용하여 단말 특정 메시지(dedicated message)를 송수신하게 된다. After transmitting the data including its identifier through the UL grant included in the random access response, the terminal waits for an instruction of the base station to resolve the collision. That is, it attempts to receive a PDCCH to receive a specific message. There are two methods for receiving the PDCCH. As mentioned above, when the third message transmitted in response to the UL grant is its C-RNTI, it attempts to receive the PDCCH using its C-RNTI, and the identifier is a unique identifier (that is, In the case of S-TMSI or a random number, it attempts to receive the PDCCH using the TC-RNTI included in the random access response. Then, in the former case, if the PDCCH is received through its C-RNTI before the conflict resolution timer expires, the terminal determines that the random access procedure has been normally performed, and terminates the random access procedure. In the latter case, if the PDCCH is received through the TC-RNTI before the conflict resolution timer expires, the data transmitted by the PDSCH indicated by the PDCCH is checked. If the unique identifier is included in the content of the data, the terminal determines that the random access procedure is normally performed, and terminates the random access procedure. The terminal acquires the C-RNTI through the fourth message, and then the terminal and the network transmit and receive a terminal-specific message using the C-RNTI.
다음은 랜덤 액세스에서 충돌 해결을 위한 방법에 대하여 설명한다.The following describes a method for conflict resolution in random access.
랜덤 액세스를 수행함에 있어서 충돌이 발생하는 이유는 기본적으로 랜덤 액세스 프리앰블의 수가 유한하기 때문이다. 즉, 기지국은 모든 단말들에게 단말 고유의 랜덤 액세스 프리앰블을 부여할 수 없기 때문에, 단말은 공통의 랜덤 액세스 프리앰블들 중에서 임의적으로 하나를 선택해서 전송하게 된다. 이에 따라 동일한 무선 자원(PRACH 자원)을 통해 둘 이상의 단말들이 같은 랜덤 액세스 프리앰블을 선택하여 전송하게 되는 경우가 발생하지만, 기지국에서는 하나의 단말에게서 전송되는 하나의 랜덤 액세스 프리앰블로 판단하게 된다. 이로 인해, 기지국은 랜덤 액세스 응답을 단말에게 전송하고 랜덤 액세스 응답은 하나의 단말이 수신할 것으로 예측한다. 하지만, 상술한 바와 같이 충돌이 발생할 수 있기 때문에, 둘 이상의 단말들이 하나의 랜덤 액세스 응답을 수신하게 되며, 이에 따라 단말마다 각각 랜덤 액세스 응답의 수신에 따른 동작을 수행하게 된다. 즉, 랜덤 액세스 응답에 포함된 하나의 UL Grant를 이용하여, 둘 이상의 단말들이 서로 다른 데이터를 동일한 무선자원에 전송하게 되는 문제점이 발생하게 된다. 이에 따라, 상기 데이터의 전송은 모두 실패할 수 도 있고, 단말들의 위치 또는 전송파워에 따라 특정 단말의 데이터만을 기지국에서 수신할 수도 있다. 후자의 경우, 둘 이상의 단말들은 모두 자신의 데이터의 전송이 성공했다고 가정하기 때문에, 기지국은 경쟁에서 실패한 단말들에게 실패 사실에 대한 정보를 알려주어야 한다. 즉, 상기 경쟁의 실패 또는 성공에 대한 정보를 알려주는 것이 충돌 해결(contention resolution)라 한다.The reason for collision in performing random access is basically because the number of random access preambles is finite. That is, since the base station cannot grant the UE-specific random access preamble to all the UEs, the UE randomly selects and transmits one of the common random access preambles. Accordingly, when two or more terminals select and transmit the same random access preamble through the same radio resource (PRACH resource), the base station determines that one random access preamble is transmitted from one terminal. For this reason, the base station transmits a random access response to the terminal and predicts that the random access response will be received by one terminal. However, as described above, since collision may occur, two or more terminals receive one random access response, and thus, each terminal performs an operation according to reception of a random access response. That is, a problem occurs in that two or more terminals transmit different data to the same radio resource by using one UL Grant included in the random access response. Accordingly, all of the data transmission may fail, or only the data of a specific terminal may be received at the base station according to the location or transmission power of the terminals. In the latter case, since both of the two or more terminals assume that the transmission of their data was successful, the base station should inform the terminals that have failed in the competition information about the fact of the failure. That is, contention of failure or success of the competition is referred to as contention resolution.
충돌 해결 방법에는 두 가지 방법이 있는데 한 가지 방법은, 충돌 해결 타이머(contention resolution timer)를 이용하는 방법과, 다른 한가지 방법은 성공한 단말의 식별자를 단말들에게 전송하는 방법이다. 전자의 경우는, 단말이 랜덤 액세스 과정 전에 이미 고유의 C-RNTI를 가지고 있는 경우에 사용된다. 즉, 이미 C-RNTI를 가지고 있는 단말은 랜덤 액세스 응답에 따라 자신의 C-RNTI를 포함한 데이터를 기지국으로 전송하고, 충돌 해결 타이머를 작동한다. 그리고, 충돌 해결 타이머가 만료되기 전에, 자신의 C-RNTI에 의해 지시되는 PDCCH 정보가 수신되면, 단말은 자신이 경쟁에서 성공했다고 판단하고, 랜덤 액세스를 정상적으로 마치게 된다. 반대로, 만약 충돌 해결 타이머가 만료되기 전에, 자신의 C-RNTI에 의해 지시되는 PDCCH를 전송 받지 못한 경우는, 자신이 경쟁에서 실패했다고 판단하고, 랜덤 액세스 과정을 다시 수행하거나, 상위 계층으로 실패 사실을 통보할 수 있다. 충돌 해소 방법 중 후자의 경우, 즉 성공한 단말의 식별자를 전송하는 방법은, 단말이 랜덤 액세스 과정 전에 고유의 셀 식별자가 없는 경우에 사용된다. 즉, 단말 자신이 셀 식별자가 없는 경우, 랜덤 액세스 응답에 포함된 UL Grant 정보에 따라 데이터에 셀 식별자 보다 상위 식별자(S-TMSI 또는 random number)를 포함하여 전송하고, 단말은 충돌 해결 타이머를 작동시킨다. 충돌 해결 타이머가 만료되기 전에, 자신의 상위 식별자를 포함한 데이터가 DL-SCH로 전송된 경우, 단말은 랜덤 액세스 과정이 성공했다고 판단한다. 반면에, 충돌 해결 타이머가 만료되기 전에, 자신의 상위 식별자를 포함한 데이터를 DL-SCH로 전송 받지 못하는 경우에는, 단말은 랜덤 액세스 과정이 실패했다고 판단하게 되는 것이다.There are two methods of conflict resolution. One method is to use a contention resolution timer, and the other is to transmit an identifier of a successful terminal to the terminals. The former case is used when the terminal already has a unique C-RNTI before the random access procedure. That is, the terminal already having the C-RNTI transmits data including its C-RNTI to the base station according to the random access response, and operates the collision resolution timer. When the PDCCH information indicated by the C-RNTI is received before the conflict resolution timer expires, the UE determines that the UE has succeeded in the competition and ends the random access normally. Conversely, if the PDCCH indicated by its C-RNTI has not been transmitted before the conflict resolution timer expires, it is determined that it has failed in the race, and the random access procedure is performed again or failed to a higher layer. Can be informed. The latter case of the collision resolution method, that is, a method of transmitting an identifier of a successful terminal is used when the terminal does not have a unique cell identifier before the random access procedure. That is, when the UE itself does not have a cell identifier, the UE transmits data including an identifier higher than the cell identifier (S-TMSI or random number) according to UL Grant information included in the random access response, and the UE operates a collision resolution timer. Let's do it. Before the conflict resolution timer expires, if data including its higher identifier is transmitted to the DL-SCH, the terminal determines that the random access procedure is successful. On the other hand, if the conflict resolution timer is not expired, if the data including its higher identifier is not transmitted to the DL-SCH, the UE is determined that the random access process has failed.
한편, 비경쟁 기반 임의접속 과정에서의 동작은 도 15에 도시된 경쟁 기반 임의접속 과정과 달리 제1 메시지 전송 및 제2 메시지 전송만으로 임의접속 절차가 종료되게 된다. 다만, 제1 메시지로서 단말이 기지국에 임의접속 프리엠블을 전송하기 전에 단말은 기지국으로부터 임의접속 프리엠블을 할당받게 되며, 이 할당받은 임의접속 프리엠블을 기지국에 제1 메시지로서 전송하고, 기지국으로부터 임의접속 응답을 수신함으로써 임의접속 절차가 종료되게 된다.Meanwhile, unlike the contention-based random access procedure illustrated in FIG. 15, the operation in the non-competitive random access procedure ends the random access procedure only by transmitting the first message and transmitting the second message. However, before the terminal transmits the random access preamble to the base station as the first message, the terminal is allocated a random access preamble from the base station, and transmits the allocated random access preamble to the base station as a first message and from the base station. The random access procedure is terminated by receiving the random access response.
PDNPDN 연결(connectivity) Connectivity
네트워크는 단말이 송수신할 패킷 데이터의 목적에 따라 적합한 패킷 데이터 네트워크(PDN: Packet Data Network)와 PDN 연결(PDN connection)(혹은 EPS 세션, IP 세션)을 생성하고, 해당 PDN 연결 내에서 베어러(bearer)들을 생성하여 패킷을 전송한다. The network generates a PDN connection (or EPS session, IP session) and a packet data network (PDN) suitable for the purpose of packet data to be transmitted and received by the terminal, and bearers within the corresponding PDN connection. ) To send packets.
여기서, PDN은 P-GW를 통해 EPC와 상호 연결되는 외부 IP 네트워크(external IP network)를 의미한다. 이러한, PDN의 일례로, 인터넷, IMS(IP Multimedia Subsystem) 등이 이에 해당될 수 있다. Here, the PDN means an external IP network interconnected with the EPC through the P-GW. As an example of such a PDN, the Internet, an IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS), and the like may correspond thereto.
그리고, PDN 연결(Connection)은 하나의 IPv4 주소 및/또는 하나의 IPv6 프리픽스(prefix)에 의해 표현되는 단말과 APN(Access Point Name)에 의해 표현되는 PDN 간의 연관(association)을 의미한다. 즉, PDN 연결은 단말과 PDN 간의 연결을 의미한다. The PDN connection means an association between a terminal represented by one IPv4 address and / or one IPv6 prefix and a PDN represented by an access point name (APN). That is, the PDN connection means a connection between the terminal and the PDN.
단말이 네트워크에 접속하기 위하여 어태치(Attach) 절차 또는 단말 요청 PDN 연결(UE requested PDN connectivity) 절차를 통해 단말과 PDN 간에 PDN 연결(PDN connection)이 확립된다. 즉, 단말이 PDN에 연결되기 위하여 해당 단말에게 PDN 주소(PDN address)(즉, 해당 PDN에서 사용될 단말의 IP 주소)가 할당된다.In order to access the network, the PDN connection is established between the UE and the PDN through an attach procedure or a UE requested PDN connectivity procedure. That is, in order for the terminal to be connected to the PDN, the terminal is assigned a PDN address (ie, an IP address of the terminal to be used in the corresponding PDN).
다시 말해, 네트워크는 단말과 PDN 간 기본(default)으로 하나의 PDN 연결과 PDN 연결 내의 기본 베어러(default bearer)를 생성하고, 단말의 IP 주소는 P-GW와 단말 간에 기본 베어러가 생성되는 과정에서 P-GW에서 생성되어 단말에게 전달된다. 그리고, 단말은 해당 PDN에 대하여 할당 받은 IP 주소를 이용하여 해당 PDN이 제공하는 서비스를 제공받게 된다. 이러한 기본 베어러는 단말이 디태치 절차(detach procedure)를 통해 네트워크에서 등록 해제(registration release) 되기 전까지 유지되며, 초기 이동 통신 네트워크에 접속 시 단말에게 할당된 IP 주소 또한 유지된다. 이때, 단말은 PDN 별로 IP 주소를 할당 받게 된다. In other words, the network creates a default bearer in one PDN connection and a PDN connection as a default between the UE and the PDN, and the IP address of the UE is generated in the process of creating a default bearer between the P-GW and the UE. It is generated in the P-GW and delivered to the terminal. In addition, the terminal receives the service provided by the corresponding PDN using the IP address allocated to the corresponding PDN. The basic bearer is maintained until the terminal is released from the network through a detach procedure, and also maintains the IP address assigned to the terminal when accessing the initial mobile communication network. At this time, the terminal is assigned an IP address for each PDN.
여기서, APN(Access Point Name)는 PDN을 식별하기 위한 식별자이다. 즉, PDN은 APN에 의해 식별된다. APN은 네트워크 ID와 사업자 ID로 구분된다. 네트워크 ID는 인터넷이나 협력 VPN(cooperate VPN) 같이 PDN을 식별하거나 IMS와 같이 PDN이 제공하는 서비스를 식별하는데 사용된다. Here, the APN (Access Point Name) is an identifier for identifying the PDN. In other words, the PDN is identified by the APN. APNs are classified into network IDs and operator IDs. The network ID is used to identify a PDN, such as the Internet or a cooperating VPN, or to identify services provided by the PDN, such as IMS.
PDN 연결의 설정은 MME에 의해 수행될 수 있으며, MME는 단말과 PDN 간에 PDN 연결을 설정하기 위해서 해당 단말이 어느 PDN으로 접속할지 및 어느 P-GW를 통해 접속할 것인가를 정한다. The establishment of the PDN connection may be performed by the MME, and the MME determines which PDN the UE connects to and which P-GW to access in order to establish a PDN connection between the UE and the PDN.
먼저, PDN을 결정하는 방법에 있어서, 단말이 접속할 PDN에 대한 정보(즉, APN)는 가입 데이터(subscription data)로 HSS에 미리 저장(provisioning)되어 있으므로, MME는 HSS로부터 가입 정보를 수신하여, 해당 단말이 접속될 PDN을 결정할 수 있다. First, in the method of determining the PDN, since information on the PDN to be accessed by the UE (ie, APN) is previously stored in the HSS as subscription data, the MME receives subscription information from the HSS. The PDN to which the corresponding UE is connected may be determined.
APN은 가입자 등록 시 등록 정보로 HSS에 미리 저장(provisioning)되고, 단말이 초기 접속 시 PDN 연결이 설정되면서 MME, S-GW, P-GW, PCRF에 저장된다. MME는 APN에 의해 정의된 PDN으로 단말을 연결해 줄 게이트웨이(즉, P-GW)를 찾는데 APN을 사용한다.The APN is pre-provisioned in the HSS as registration information when the subscriber is registered, and is stored in the MME, S-GW, P-GW, and PCRF as the PDN connection is established when the terminal is initially connected. The MME uses the APN to find a gateway (ie, P-GW) to connect the UE to the PDN defined by the APN.
디폴트 APN(Default APN)는 가입 정보/데이터(subscription data)에 디폴트로 마크된(marked)된 APN으로 정의된다. 단말에게 제공되는 APN이 없을 때, 어태치(Attach) 절차 및 단말 요청 PDN 연결(UE requested PDN connectivity) 절차에서 사용된다. The default APN is defined as an APN marked by default in subscription information / subscription data. When there is no APN provided to the terminal, it is used in the attach procedure and the UE requested PDN connectivity procedure.
다음으로, P-GW를 결정하는 방법에 있어서, HSS에 미리 저장(provisioning)된 가입 정보(subscription information)를 이용하는 방식과 MME가 미리 정해진 P-GW 선택 정책을 이용하여 P-GW를 결정하는 방식이 있다. 전자의 경우, MME는 단말이 PDN 접속 시 HSS로부터 해당 단말이 사용할 P-GW를 확인하고, 해당 P-GW를 통해 단말에 대한 PDN 연결을 설정하도록 한다.Next, in the method of determining the P-GW, a method of using subscription information pre-stored in the HSS and a method of determining the P-GW using a predetermined P-GW selection policy. There is this. In the former case, the MME checks the P-GW to be used by the UE from the HSS when the UE accesses the PDN, and establishes a PDN connection to the UE through the corresponding P-GW.
P-GW ID(Identity)는 P-GW를 식별하기 위하여 사용되는 식별자이며, IP 주소 또는 FQDN(Fully Qualified Domain Name) 형태를 가질 수 있다. The P-GW ID is an identifier used to identify the P-GW and may have an IP address or a fully qualified domain name (FQDN).
예를 들어, 단말의 디폴트 APN(PDN)으로 PDN 1(예를 들어, 인터넷)이 설정된 경우, 단말이 네트워크에 초기 접속한 경우 MME는 HSS에게 해당 단말의 가입 정보를 요청한다. 그리고, MME는 HSS로부터 해당 단말의 디폴트 PDN인 PDN 1과 PDN 1으로 접속하기 위한 P-GW는 P-GW 1라는 정보를 수신한다. 그리고, MME는 P-GW 1을 통하여 단말과 PDN 1 간에 PDN 연결을 설정한다. 이때, MME는 P-GW 1을 식별하기 위하여 P-GW ID를 이용한다. 만약, P-GW ID가 FQDN으로 주어진 경우에는 MME는 DNS 쿼리(Query)를 통해 P-GW IP 주소를 획득할 수 있다. 이때, DNS가 P-GW 리스트를 주는 경우 MME는 P-GW 선택 정책에 따라 그 중 하나를 선택할 수 있다.For example, when PDN 1 (eg, the Internet) is set as the default APN (PDN) of the terminal, when the terminal initially accesses the network, the MME requests subscription information of the terminal from the HSS. And, the MME receives the information that the P-GW P-
PDN 타입(또는 IP 버전)으로는 IPv4(IP Version 4), IPv6(IP Version 6), IPv4v6의 세 가지 타입이 정의되어 있다. Three types of PDN types (or IP versions) are defined: IPv4 (IP Version 4), IPv6 (IP Version 6), and IPv4v6.
먼저, IPv4 PDN 타입의 경우, 네트워크는 어태치 절차(Attach Procedure) 또는 단말 요청 PDN 연결(UE requested PDN connectivity) 절차에서 기본 베어러 활성화 과정에서 단말에게 IP 주소를 할당할 수 있으며, 또한 단말의 접속 절차(Attach Procedure) 이후에 DHCP(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) 절차를 통하여 할당할 수도 있다. First, in the case of the IPv4 PDN type, the network may assign an IP address to the terminal during the basic bearer activation in the attach procedure or the UE requested PDN connectivity procedure, and the access procedure of the terminal. (Attach Procedure) can also be assigned through the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) procedure.
IPv6 PDN 타입의 경우, 네트워크는 글로벌 IPv6 주소 할당을 위하여 IPv6 SLLAC(Stateless Address Auto-configuration) 과정을 수행하는데, 단말은 접속 절차(Attach Procedure) 또는 단말 요청 PDN 연결(UE requested PDN connectivity) 절차에서 기본 베어러 활성화 과정에서 64 비트 인터페이스 식별자(IID: Interface Identifier)를 할당받고, 이후 IPv6 SLLAC 과정을 통하여 64 비트 프리픽스(prefix)를 할당 받음으로써, 전체 128 비트의 글로벌 IPv6 주소를 할당받을 수 있다. In the case of IPv6 PDN type, the network performs IPv6 stateless address auto-configuration (SLLAC) procedure for global IPv6 address assignment, and the terminal is a basic service in the attach procedure or UE requested PDN connectivity procedure. A 64-bit Interface Identifier (IID) is assigned in the bearer activation process, and a 64-bit prefix is allocated through the IPv6 SLLAC process, thereby allowing a global IPv6 address of 128 bits to be allocated.
IPv4v6 PDN 타입의 경우는 앞서 설명한 IPv4 PDN 타입과 IPv6 PDN 타입의 주소 할당 방법이 동시에 적용된다.In the case of the IPv4v6 PDN type, the above-described address allocation method of the IPv4 PDN type and the IPv6 PDN type is applied simultaneously.
이하, 단말과 PDN과의 PDN 연결을 확립하는 절차를 살펴본다. Hereinafter, a procedure of establishing a PDN connection between a terminal and a PDN will be described.
도 11은 본 발명이 적용될 수 있는 무선 통신 시스템에서 어태치(Attach) 절차를 간략히 예시하는 도면이다. 11 is a diagram briefly illustrating an attach procedure in a wireless communication system to which the present invention may be applied.
어태치 절차(Attach procedure)는 일반적으로 단말이 E-UTRAN 셀(cell)에 진입하였을 때 네트워크에 연결(connection)을 맺기 위하여 이용된다. 또한, non-3GPP 네트워크로부터 E-UTRAN으로 핸드오버(handover)되는 경우에도 이용될 수 있다. The attach procedure is generally used to establish a connection to a network when the UE enters an E-UTRAN cell. It may also be used in case of handover from the non-3GPP network to the E-UTRAN.
1-2. 단말(UE)은 어태치 요청(Attach Request) 메시지를 MME에게 전송함으로써 어태치 절차를 개시한다. 1-2. The UE (UE) initiates the attach procedure by sending an Attach Request message to the MME.
어태치 요청(Attach Request) 메시지는 단말의 IMSI(International Mobile Subscriber Identity), 단말이 요청하는 PDN 타입 등을 포함한다. 여기서, PDN 타입은 단말에 의해 요청되는 IP 버전(즉, IPv4, IPv4v6, IPv6)을 지시한다.The attach request message includes an International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) of the terminal, a PDN type requested by the terminal, and the like. Here, the PDN type indicates an IP version (ie, IPv4, IPv4v6, IPv6) requested by the terminal.
어태치 요청(Attach Request) 메시지는 RRC 연결에서 RRC 연결 셋업 완료(RRC Connection Setup Complete) 메시지에 포함되어 전달되고, S1 시그널링 연결에서 초기 UE 메시지(Initial UE message)에 포함되어 전달된다.The Attach Request message is included in the RRC Connection Setup Complete message in the RRC connection and delivered, and is included in the Initial UE message in the S1 signaling connection.
3. MME는 단말 인증을 위해 HSS에게 인증을 위한 정보를 요청하여 수신하고, 단말과 상호 인증을 수행한다.3. The MME requests and receives information for authentication from the HSS for terminal authentication, and performs mutual authentication with the terminal.
4. MME는 HSS에게 단말의 위치를 등록하고, 단말에게 디폴트 베어러(default bearer)를 생성하기 위하여 HSS로부터 사용자 가입 정보(즉, 가입 QoS 프로파일(subscribed QoS Profile))를 수신한다.4. The MME registers the location of the terminal to the HSS and receives user subscription information (ie, subscribed QoS Profile) from the HSS to create a default bearer for the terminal.
여기서, 유동 IP 주소 할당(dynamic IP address allocation)의 경우 가입 정보는 해당 단말에 대한 IP 주소 정보를 포함하지 않으나, 고정 IP 주소 할당(static IP address allocation)의 경우 가입 정보는 해당 단말에게 할당된 고정 IP 주소 정보를 포함한다. Here, in the case of dynamic IP address allocation, the subscription information does not include IP address information for the corresponding terminal, but in the case of static IP address allocation, the subscription information is fixed assigned to the corresponding terminal. Contains IP address information.
5. MME는 디폴트 EPS 베어러 ID를 할당하고, S-GW에게 세션 생성 요청(Create Session Request) 메시지를 전송한다. 5. The MME assigns a default EPS bearer ID and sends a Create Session Request message to the S-GW.
세션 생성 요청(Create Session Request) 메시지는 단말의 IMSI, EPS 베어러 ID, MME가 EPS 베어러 생성을 위해 선택한 P-GW ID(즉, P-GW 주소), APN, HSS로부터 수신한 가입 QoS 프로파일, PDN 타입, 단말의 IP 주소(즉, PDN 주소) 등을 포함한다. The Create Session Request message includes the IMSI of the UE, the EPS bearer ID, the P-GW ID selected by the MME for creating the EPS bearer (ie, the P-GW address), the subscription QoS profile received from the APN, and the HSS, and the PDN. Type, IP address (ie, PDN address) of the terminal, and the like.
여기서, PDN 타입은 단말로부터 수신된 PDN 타입 정보가 동일하게 포함된다. 유동 IP 주소 할당(dynamic IP address allocation)의 경우 단말의 IP 주소는 0 값으로 셋팅될 수 있으며, 고정 IP 주소 할당(static IP address allocation)의 경우 해당 단말에게 할당된 고정 IP 주소 정보(가입 정보에 포함)로 셋팅될 수 있다. Here, the PDN type includes the same PDN type information received from the terminal. In the case of dynamic IP address allocation, the IP address of the terminal may be set to 0. In the case of static IP address allocation, the static IP address information allocated to the terminal may be Inclusively).
6. S-GW는 MME로부터 수신한 세션 생성 요청(Create Session Request) 메시지에 포함된 P-GW로 S5 베어러를 생성하기 위하여 S5 S-GW TEID(Tunnel Endpoint Identifier)를 할당하고, 해당 P-GW에게 세션 생성 요청(Create Session Request) 메시지를 전송한다. 6. The S-GW allocates an S5 S-GW Tunnel Endpoint Identifier (TEID) to create an S5 bearer with the P-GW included in the Create Session Request message received from the MME, and the corresponding P-GW. Send a Create Session Request message to the user.
세션 생성 요청(Create Session Request) 메시지는 단말의 IMSI, EPS 베어러 ID, S5 S-GW TEID, APN, 가입 QoS 프로파일, PDN 타입(즉, IP 버전), 단말의 IP 주소(즉, PDN 주소) 등을 포함한다. The Create Session Request message includes the IMSI, EPS bearer ID, S5 S-GW TEID, APN, subscription QoS profile, PDN type (i.e., IP version), IP address (i.e., PDN address) of the terminal, and the like. It includes.
7. P-GW는 단말이 사용할 IP(Internet Protocol) 주소를 할당하고, PCRF와 IP-CAN(IP connectivity access network) 세션 확립(establishment)/수정(modification) 절차를 수행한다. 7. The P-GW allocates an Internet Protocol (IP) address to be used by the terminal and performs a PCRF and IP connectivity access network (IP-CAN) session establishment / modification procedure.
이때, P-GW는 유동 IP 주소 할당(dynamic IP address allocation)의 경우 P-GW가 보유한 IP 주소 풀(pool)에서 선택된 IP 주소를 단말에 할당할 수 있으며, 고정 IP 주소 할당(static IP address allocation)의 경우 해당 단말에게 할당된 고정 IP 주소 정보(가입 정보에 포함)가 동일하게 할당될 수 있다. In this case, the P-GW may allocate an IP address selected from the IP address pool owned by the P-GW to the terminal in the case of dynamic IP address allocation, and a static IP address allocation. ), The fixed IP address information (included in the subscription information) allocated to the terminal may be identically allocated.
8. P-GW는 S-GW로 S5 베어러를 생성하기 위하여 P-GW TEID(Tunnel Endpoint Identifier)를 할당하고, 세션 생성 요청(Create Session Request) 메시지에 대한 응답으로 S-GW에게 세션 생성 응답(Create Session Response) 메시지 전송한다.8. The P-GW allocates a P-GW Tunnel Endpoint Identifier (TEID) to create an S5 bearer with the S-GW, and sends a session creation response to the S-GW in response to a Create Session Request message. Create Session Response) message.
세션 생성 응답(Create Session Response) 메시지는 단말의 IMSI, EPS 베어러 ID, S5 P-GW TEID, 가입 QoS 프로파일, PDN 타입, 단말에 할당된 IP 주소(즉, PDN 주소) 등을 포함한다. The Create Session Response message includes an IMSI of the terminal, an EPS bearer ID, an S5 P-GW TEID, a subscription QoS profile, a PDN type, an IP address assigned to the terminal (ie, a PDN address), and the like.
만약, P-GW가 요청된 PDN 타입과 상이한 PDN 타입을 선택하였으면, P-GW는 PDN 타입과 함께 왜 PDN 타입이 수정되었는지 원인을 단말에게 지시한다. If the P-GW selects a PDN type different from the requested PDN type, the P-GW indicates to the UE why the PDN type is modified along with the PDN type.
이 절차를 마치면 S-GW와 P-GW 간에 S5 베어러의 생성이 완료되어, S-GW는 P-GW로 상향링크 트래픽을 전송하거나 P-GW로부터 하향링크 트래픽을 수신할 수 있다. After completing this procedure, the generation of the S5 bearer between the S-GW and the P-GW is completed, and the S-GW may transmit uplink traffic to the P-GW or receive downlink traffic from the P-GW.
9. S-GW는 S1 베어러를 생성하기 위하여 S1 S-GW TEID를 할당하고, 세션 생성 요청(Create Session Request) 메시지에 대한 응답으로 세션 생성 응답(Create Session Response) 메시지를 MME에게 전송한다.9. The S-GW allocates the S1 S-GW TEID to create the S1 bearer, and sends a Create Session Response message to the MME in response to the Create Session Request message.
세션 생성 응답(Create Session Response) 메시지는 단말의 IMSI, EPS 베어러 ID, S1 S-GW TEID, PDN 타입, 단말에 할당된 IP 주소(즉, PDN 주소) 등을 포함한다. The Create Session Response message includes an IMSI of the terminal, an EPS bearer ID, an S1 S-GW TEID, a PDN type, an IP address assigned to the terminal (ie, a PDN address), and the like.
10-11. MME는 어태치 요청(Attach Request) 메시지에 대한 응답으로 어태치 승인(Attach Accept) 메시지를 단말에게 전송한다. 10-11. The MME transmits an attach accept message to the terminal in response to an attach request message.
어태치 승인(Attach Accept) 메시지는 EPS 베어러 ID, APN, P-GW에서 할당한 단말의 IP 주소(즉, PDN 주소), PDN 타입, 트래킹 영역 식별자(TAI: Tracking Area Identity) 리스트, TAU 타이머 등을 포함한다. Attach Accept message includes EPS bearer ID, APN, IP address (ie PDN address) of UE assigned by P-GW, PDN type, Tracking Area Identity (TAI) list, TAU timer, etc. It includes.
어태치 승인(Attach Accept) 메시지는 S1 시그널링 연결에서 초기 컨텍스트 셋업 요청(Initial Context Setup Request) 메시지에 포함되어 기지국에 전달된다. The attach accept message is included in an initial context setup request message in the S1 signaling connection and delivered to the base station.
이 절차를 마치면, 기지국과 S-GW 간에 상향링크 S1 베어러의 생성이 완료되고, 기지국은 S-GW에게 상향링크 트래픽을 전송할 수 있다. After completing this procedure, the generation of the uplink S1 bearer between the base station and the S-GW is completed, the base station can transmit the uplink traffic to the S-GW.
그리고, 어태치 승인(Attach Accept) 메시지는 RRC 연결에서 RRC 연결 재설정(RRC Connection Reconfiguration) 메시지에 포함되어 기지국으로부터 단말에게 전달된다.The attach accept message is included in the RRC connection reconfiguration message in the RRC connection and transmitted from the base station to the terminal.
이 절차를 마치면, 단말과 기지국 간에 DRB의 생성이 완료되어, 단말은 기지국으로 상향링크 트래픽을 전송하거나 기지국으로부터 하향링크 트래픽을 수신할 수 있다.After completing this procedure, the generation of the DRB between the terminal and the base station is completed, the terminal may transmit the uplink traffic to the base station or receive downlink traffic from the base station.
12. 기지국은 초기 컨텍스트 셋업 요청(Initial Context Setup Request) 메시지에 대한 응답으로 초기 컨텍스트 셋업 응답(Initial Context Setup Response) 메시지를 MME에게 전송한다. 초기 컨텍스트 셋업 응답(Initial Context Setup Response) 메시지는 S1 eNB TEID 등을 포함한다.12. The base station transmits an initial context setup response message to the MME in response to the initial context setup request message. The Initial Context Setup Response message includes an S1 eNB TEID.
13-14. 단말은 어태치 승인(Attach Accept) 메시지에 대한 응답으로 어태치 완료(Attach Complete) 메시지를 MME에게 전송한다. 13-14. The terminal transmits an Attach Complete message to the MME in response to the Attach Accept message.
어태치 완료(Attach Complete) 메시지는 RRC 연결에서 상향링크 정보 전달(UL Information Transfer) 메시지에 포함되어 전달되고, S1 시그널링 연결에서 상향링크 NAS 전달(Uplink NAS Transport) 메시지에 포함되어 전달된다. The Attach Complete message is included in the UL Information Transfer message in the RRC connection and transmitted, and is included in the Uplink NAS Transport message in the S1 signaling connection.
이 절차를 마치면, 단말과 P-GW 간 상향링크 디폴트 EPS 베어러의 생성이 완료되어 단말은 P-GW로 상향링크 데이터를 전송할 수 있다. After this procedure, the generation of the uplink default EPS bearer between the terminal and the P-GW is completed, the terminal may transmit the uplink data to the P-GW.
15. MME는 기지국으로부터 수신한 S1 eNB TEID를 수정 베어러 요청(Modify Bearer Request) 메시지를 통해 S-GW에게 전달한다.15. The MME delivers the S1 eNB TEID received from the base station to the S-GW through a Modify Bearer Request message.
이 절차를 마치면, 기지국과 S-GW 간에 하향링크 S1 베어러의 생성이 완료되고, 기지국은 S-GW로부터 하향링크 트래픽을 수신할 수 있다.After this procedure, the generation of the downlink S1 bearer between the base station and the S-GW is completed, the base station can receive the downlink traffic from the S-GW.
16-17. 필요에 따라 S-GW와 P-GW 간에 베어러가 갱신(update) 된다. 16-17. If necessary, bearers are updated between the S-GW and the P-GW.
18. S-GW는 수정 베어러 요청(Modify Bearer Request) 메시지에 대한 응답으로 수정 베어러 응답(Modify Bearer Response) 메시지를 MME에게 전송한다. 18. The S-GW sends a Modify Bearer Response message to the MME in response to the Modify Bearer Request message.
이 절차를 마치면, 단말과 P-GW 간 하향링크 디폴트 EPS 베어러의 생성이 완료되어 P-GW는 단말로 하향링크 데이터를 전송할 수 있다. 즉, 단말은 PDN과 연결이 확립되고, 할당 받은 IP 주소를 이용하여 PDN 서비스를 제공 받을 수 있다. After this procedure, the generation of the downlink default EPS bearer between the terminal and the P-GW is completed, the P-GW may transmit the downlink data to the terminal. That is, the terminal may establish a connection with the PDN and receive the PDN service using the assigned IP address.
19. MME는 필요에 따라 P-GW ID(즉, P-GW 주소), APN을 포함하는 통지 요청(Notify Request) 메시지를 HSS에게 전송한다. 19. The MME sends a Notify Request message to the HSS including the P-GW ID (ie, P-GW address) and APN as needed.
20. HSS는 P-GW ID(즉, P-GW 주소) 및 연관된 APN을 저장하고, MME에게 통지 응답(Notify Response) 메시지를 전송한다. 20. The HSS stores the P-GW ID (ie, P-GW address) and associated APN and sends a Notify Response message to the MME.
도 12는 본 발명이 적용될 수 있는 무선 통신 시스템에서 단말 요청 PDN 연결 절차(UE requested PDN connectivity procedure)를 예시하는 도면이다. 12 is a diagram illustrating a UE requested PDN connectivity procedure in a wireless communication system to which the present invention can be applied.
단말 요청 PDN 연결 절차(UE requested PDN connectivity procedure)는 단말이 E-UTRAN을 통해 추가적인 PDN으로의 연결(디폴트 베어러의 할당 포함)을 요청하기 위하여 이용된다. The UE requested PDN connectivity procedure is used for the UE to request connection (including assignment of a default bearer) to an additional PDN through the E-UTRAN.
1. 단말은 PDN 연결 요청(PDN Connectivity Request) 메시지를 MME에게 전송함으로써 단말 요청 PDN 절차(UE Requested PDN procedure)를 개시한다. 1. The UE initiates a UE Requested PDN procedure by sending a PDN Connectivity Request message to the MME.
PDN 연결 요청(PDN Connectivity Request) 메시지는 APN, 단말이 요청하는 PDN 타입(즉, IP 버전) 등을 포함한다. 상술한 바와 같이, PDN 타입은 단말에 의해 요청되는 IP 버전(즉, IPv4, IPv4v6, IPv6)을 지시한다. The PDN Connectivity Request message includes an APN, a PDN type (ie, an IP version) requested by the UE, and the like. As described above, the PDN type indicates the IP version (ie, IPv4, IPv4v6, IPv6) requested by the terminal.
MME는 단말에 의해 제공된 APN이 가입 정보에 의해 허용되는지 검증(verify)한다. 만약, 단말이 PDN 연결 요청(PDN Connectivity Request) 메시지에 APN을 제공하지 않은 경우, MME는 디폴트 PDN 가입 컨텍스트(default PDN subscription context)로부터 APN을 사용한다. The MME verifies whether the APN provided by the terminal is allowed by the subscription information. If the terminal does not provide the APN in the PDN Connectivity Request message, the MME uses the APN from the default PDN subscription context.
2. MME는 EPS 베어러 ID를 할당하고, S-GW에게 세션 생성 요청(Create Session Request) 메시지를 전송한다.2. The MME assigns an EPS bearer ID and sends a Create Session Request message to the S-GW.
세션 생성 요청(Create Session Request) 메시지는 단말의 IMSI, EPS 베어러 ID, MME가 EPS 베어러 생성을 위해 선택한 P-GW ID(즉, P-GW 주소), APN, HSS로부터 수신한 가입 QoS 프로파일, PDN 타입, 단말의 IP 주소(즉, PDN 주소) 등을 포함한다. The Create Session Request message includes the IMSI of the UE, the EPS bearer ID, the P-GW ID selected by the MME for creating the EPS bearer (ie, the P-GW address), the subscription QoS profile received from the APN, and the HSS, and the PDN. Type, IP address (ie, PDN address) of the terminal, and the like.
여기서, PDN 타입은 단말로부터 수신된 PDN 타입 정보가 동일하게 포함된다. 유동 IP 주소 할당(dynamic IP address allocation)의 경우 단말의 IP 주소는 0 값으로 셋팅될 수 있으며, 고정 IP 주소 할당(static IP address allocation)의 경우 해당 단말에게 할당된 고정 IP 주소 정보(가입 정보에 포함)로 셋팅될 수 있다. Here, the PDN type includes the same PDN type information received from the terminal. In the case of dynamic IP address allocation, the IP address of the terminal may be set to 0. In the case of static IP address allocation, the static IP address information allocated to the terminal may be Inclusively).
3. S-GW는 MME로부터 수신한 세션 생성 요청(Create Session Request) 메시지에 포함된 P-GW로 S5 베어러를 생성하기 위하여 S5 S-GW TEID(Tunnel Endpoint Identifier)를 할당하고, 해당 P-GW에게 세션 생성 요청(Create Session Request) 메시지를 전송한다. 3. The S-GW allocates an S5 S-GW Tunnel Endpoint Identifier (TEID) to create an S5 bearer with the P-GW included in the Create Session Request message received from the MME, and the corresponding P-GW. Send a Create Session Request message to the user.
세션 생성 요청(Create Session Request) 메시지는 단말의 IMSI, EPS 베어러 ID, S5 S-GW TEID, APN, 가입 QoS 프로파일, PDN 타입(즉, IP 버전), 단말의 IP 주소(즉, PDN 주소) 등을 포함한다. The Create Session Request message includes the IMSI, EPS bearer ID, S5 S-GW TEID, APN, subscription QoS profile, PDN type (i.e., IP version), IP address (i.e., PDN address) of the terminal, and the like. It includes.
4. P-GW는 단말이 사용할 IP(Internet Protocol) 주소를 할당하고, PCRF와 IP-CAN(IP connectivity access network) 세션 확립(establishment)/수정(modification) 절차를 수행한다. 4. The P-GW allocates an Internet Protocol (IP) address to be used by the terminal and performs a PCRF and IP connectivity access network (IP-CAN) session establishment / modification procedure.
이때, P-GW는 유동 IP 주소 할당(dynamic IP address allocation)의 경우 P-GW가 보유한 IP 주소 풀(pool)에서 선택된 IP 주소를 단말에 할당할 수 있으며, 고정 IP 주소 할당(static IP address allocation)의 경우 해당 단말에게 할당된 고정 IP 주소 정보(가입 정보에 포함)가 동일하게 할당될 수 있다. In this case, the P-GW may allocate an IP address selected from the IP address pool owned by the P-GW to the terminal in the case of dynamic IP address allocation, and a static IP address allocation. ), The fixed IP address information (included in the subscription information) allocated to the terminal may be identically allocated.
5. P-GW는 S-GW로 S5 베어러를 생성하기 위하여 P-GW TEID(Tunnel Endpoint Identifier)를 할당하고, 세션 생성 요청(Create Session Request) 메시지에 대한 응답으로 S-GW에게 세션 생성 응답(Create Session Response) 메시지 전송한다.5. The P-GW allocates a P-GW Tunnel Endpoint Identifier (TEID) to create an S5 bearer with the S-GW, and responds to the S-GW with a session creation response (in response to a Create Session Request message). Create Session Response) message.
세션 생성 응답(Create Session Response) 메시지는 단말의 IMSI, EPS 베어러 ID, S5 P-GW TEID, 가입 QoS 프로파일, PDN 타입, 단말에 할당된 IP 주소(즉, PDN 주소) 등을 포함한다.The Create Session Response message includes an IMSI of the terminal, an EPS bearer ID, an S5 P-GW TEID, a subscription QoS profile, a PDN type, an IP address assigned to the terminal (ie, a PDN address), and the like.
만약, P-GW가 요청된 PDN 타입과 상이한 PDN 타입을 선택하였으면, P-GW는 PDN 타입과 함께 왜 PDN 타입이 수정되었는지 원인을 단말에게 지시한다. If the P-GW selects a PDN type different from the requested PDN type, the P-GW indicates to the UE why the PDN type is modified along with the PDN type.
이 절차를 마치면 S-GW와 P-GW 간에 S5 베어러의 생성이 완료되어, S-GW는 P-GW로 상향링크 트래픽을 전송하거나 P-GW로부터 하향링크 트래픽을 수신할 수 있다. After completing this procedure, the generation of the S5 bearer between the S-GW and the P-GW is completed, and the S-GW may transmit uplink traffic to the P-GW or receive downlink traffic from the P-GW.
6. S-GW는 S1 베어러를 생성하기 위하여 S1 S-GW TEID를 할당하고, 세션 생성 요청(Create Session Request) 메시지에 대한 응답으로 세션 생성 응답(Create Session Response) 메시지를 MME에게 전송한다.6. The S-GW allocates the S1 S-GW TEID to create the S1 bearer, and sends a Create Session Response message to the MME in response to the Create Session Request message.
세션 생성 응답(Create Session Response) 메시지는 단말의 IMSI, EPS 베어러 ID, S1 S-GW TEID, PDN 타입, 단말에 할당된 IP 주소(즉, PDN 주소) 등을 포함한다. The Create Session Response message includes an IMSI of the terminal, an EPS bearer ID, an S1 S-GW TEID, a PDN type, an IP address assigned to the terminal (ie, a PDN address), and the like.
7. MME는 PDN 연결 요청(PDN Connectivity Request) 메시지에 대한 응답으로 PDN 연결 승인(PDN Connectivity Accept) 메시지를 단말에게 전송한다. 7. The MME transmits a PDN Connectivity Accept message to the UE in response to the PDN Connectivity Request message.
PDN 연결 승인(PDN Connectivity Accept) 메시지는 EPS 베어러 ID, APN, P-GW에서 할당한 단말의 IP 주소(즉, PDN 주소), PDN 타입 등을 포함한다.The PDN Connectivity Accept message includes an EPS bearer ID, an APN, an IP address (ie, a PDN address), a PDN type, etc. of a UE allocated by the P-GW.
PDN 연결 승인(PDN Connectivity Accept) 메시지는 S1 시그널링 연결에서 베어러 셋업 요청(Bearer Setup Request) 메시지에 포함되어 기지국에 전달된다. The PDN Connectivity Accept message is included in the bearer setup request message in the S1 signaling connection and delivered to the base station.
이 절차를 마치면, 기지국과 S-GW 간에 상향링크 S1 베어러의 생성이 완료되고, 기지국은 S-GW에게 상향링크 트래픽을 전송할 수 있다. After completing this procedure, the generation of the uplink S1 bearer between the base station and the S-GW is completed, the base station can transmit the uplink traffic to the S-GW.
8. PDN 연결 승인(PDN Connectivity Accept) 메시지는 RRC 연결에서 RRC 연결 재설정(RRC Connection Reconfiguration) 메시지에 포함되어 기지국으로부터 단말에게 전달된다.8. The PDN Connectivity Accept message is included in the RRC Connection Reconfiguration message in the RRC connection and transmitted from the base station to the terminal.
이 절차를 마치면, 단말과 기지국 간에 DRB의 생성이 완료되어, 단말은 기지국으로 상향링크 트래픽을 전송하거나 기지국으로부터 하향링크 트래픽을 수신할 수 있다.After completing this procedure, the generation of the DRB between the terminal and the base station is completed, the terminal may transmit the uplink traffic to the base station or receive downlink traffic from the base station.
9. 단말은 기지국에게 RRC 연결 재설정 완료(RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete) 메시지를 전송한다. 9. The terminal transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration complete message to the base station.
10. 기지국은 베어러 셋업 응답(Bearer Setup Response) 메시지를 MME에게 전송한다.10. The base station sends a bearer setup response message to the MME.
베어러 셋업 응답(Bearer Setup Response) 메시지는 S1 eNB TEID 등을 포함한다.The bearer setup response message includes an S1 eNB TEID.
11-12. 단말은 EPS 베어러 ID를 포함하는 PDN 연결 완료(PDN Connectivity Complete) 메시지를 MME에게 전송한다. 11-12. The terminal transmits a PDN Connectivity Complete message including the EPS bearer ID to the MME.
이 절차를 마치면, 단말과 P-GW 간 상향링크 디폴트 EPS 베어러의 생성이 완료되어 단말은 P-GW로 상향링크 데이터를 전송할 수 있다. After this procedure, the generation of the uplink default EPS bearer between the terminal and the P-GW is completed, the terminal may transmit the uplink data to the P-GW.
13. MME는 기지국으로부터 수신한 S1 eNB TEID를 수정 베어러 요청(Modify Bearer Request) 메시지를 통해 S-GW에게 전달한다.13. The MME forwards the S1 eNB TEID received from the base station to the S-GW through a Modify Bearer Request message.
이 절차를 마치면, 기지국과 S-GW 간에 하향링크 S1 베어러의 생성이 완료되고, 기지국은 S-GW로부터 하향링크 트래픽을 수신할 수 있다.After this procedure, the generation of the downlink S1 bearer between the base station and the S-GW is completed, the base station can receive the downlink traffic from the S-GW.
13a-13b. 필요에 따라 S-GW와 P-GW 간에 베어러가 갱신(update) 된다. 13a-13b. If necessary, bearers are updated between the S-GW and the P-GW.
14. S-GW는 수정 베어러 요청(Modify Bearer Request) 메시지에 대한 응답으로 수정 베어러 응답(Modify Bearer Response) 메시지를 MME에게 전송한다. 14. The S-GW sends a Modify Bearer Response message to the MME in response to the Modify Bearer Request message.
이 절차를 마치면, 단말과 P-GW 간 하향링크 디폴트 EPS 베어러의 생성이 완료되어 P-GW는 단말로 하향링크 데이터를 전송할 수 있다. 즉, 단말은 PDN과 연결이 확립되고, 할당 받은 IP 주소를 이용하여 PDN 서비스를 제공 받을 수 있다. After this procedure, the generation of the downlink default EPS bearer between the terminal and the P-GW is completed, the P-GW may transmit the downlink data to the terminal. That is, the terminal may establish a connection with the PDN and receive the PDN service using the assigned IP address.
15. MME는 필요에 따라 P-GW ID(즉, P-GW 주소), APN을 포함하는 통지 요청(Notify Request) 메시지를 HSS에게 전송한다. 15. The MME sends a Notify Request message to the HSS that includes the P-GW ID (ie, P-GW address) and APN as needed.
16. HSS는 P-GW ID(즉, P-GW 주소) 및 연관된 APN을 저장하고, MME에게 통지 응답(Notify Response) 메시지를 전송한다. 16. The HSS stores the P-GW ID (ie, P-GW address) and associated APN and sends a Notify Response message to the MME.
PDNPDN 타입 type 폴백Fallback (fallback) 제어 방법(fallback) control method
현재, IPv4(IP Version 4) 주소(address) 부족을 해결하기 위해 IPv6(IP Version 6)가 개발되어 현재 사업자들이 그 전환작업을 준비 중이다. 다만, 그 전환(migration) 중 발생 가능한 문제점들을 해결하기 위해 3GPP에서 스터디가 진행되었다(3GPP TR 23.975 참조). Currently, IPv Version 6 (IPv6) has been developed to address the lack of IP Version 4 (IPv4) addresses, and operators are preparing to transition. However, studies have been conducted in 3GPP to address possible problems during the migration (see 3GPP TR 23.975).
아래 표 2는 단말과 네트워크의 IP 버전 성능(capability)에 의해 실질적으로 생성되는 PDN 타입을 분류한 것이다. Table 2 below categorizes PDN types that are substantially generated by IP version capabilities of UEs and networks.
표 2는 PDN 타입 및 PDN 연결을 예시하는 표이다. Table 2 is a table illustrating PDN types and PDN connections.
표 2를 참조하면, 단말이 요청한 PDN 타입이 IPv4v6이고, HSS에 가입된 PDN 타입이 IPv4v6인 경우, 듀얼 주소를 가지는 단일의 PDN 연결이 확립된다. Referring to Table 2, when the PDN type requested by the UE is IPv4v6 and the PDN type subscribed to the HSS is IPv4v6, a single PDN connection having a dual address is established.
반면, 단말이 요청한 PDN 타입이 IPv4v6이고, HSS에 가입된 PDN 타입이 IPv4 및 IPv6인 경우, 각 단일의 주소를 가지는 2개의 PDN 연결이 확립된다. On the other hand, if the PDN type requested by the UE is IPv4v6 and the PDN types subscribed to the HSS are IPv4 and IPv6, two PDN connections having a single address are established.
단말이 요청한 PDN 타입이 IPv4v6이고, HSS에 가입된 PDN 타입이 IPv4 또는 IPv6인 경우, 단일의 주소를 가지는 1개의 PDN 연결이 확립된다. 또한, HSS에 가입된 PDN 타입이 IPv4v6인 경우, 단말이 요청한 PDN 타입이 IPv4 또는 IPv6인 경우, 단일의 주소를 가지는 1개의 PDN 연결이 확립된다. If the PDN type requested by the terminal is IPv4v6 and the PDN type subscribed to the HSS is IPv4 or IPv6, one PDN connection having a single address is established. In addition, when the PDN type subscribed to the HSS is IPv4v6, when the PDN type requested by the UE is IPv4 or IPv6, one PDN connection having a single address is established.
즉, 단일의 PDN 연결(One PDN connection)에 대해 듀얼 스택(dual stack)(IPv4, IPV6)을 지원하는 듀얼 주소 베어러(Dual address bearer)가 존재하고, 또한 IPv4, IPv6 PDN 연결을 각각 설정하는 2개의 PDN 연결(Two PDN connections)이 존재한다. That is, there is a dual address bearer that supports dual stack (IPv4, IPV6) for a single PDN connection, and also configures IPv4 and IPv6 PDN connections, respectively. There are two PDN connections.
이를 통해 IPv6를 지원하지 않는 어플리케이션과의 하위 호환성(backward compatibility) 문제를 해결하고 또한 IPv6 시스템에 문제가 발생해도 IPv4로 사용할 수 있어서 IPv6 장애 문제를 해결하는 방법으로 제안되었다.Through this, backward compatibility with applications that do not support IPv6 is solved, and even if a problem occurs in IPv6 system, it can be used as IPv4.
3GPP 표준에서는 위에서 설명한 바와 같이 동일한 PDN 연결에 대하여 IPv4와 IPv6 주소를 모두 할당할 수 있도록 하는 방법을 통해 IP 버전 전환(migration)을 권장하고 있다. As described above, the 3GPP standard recommends IP version migration by allowing both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses to be assigned to the same PDN connection.
하지만, 이 경우 사업자(Operator)는 두 개의 IP 주소 풀(pool)을 운영해야 하는 부담감이 있기 때문에 실질적인 해결방안이 아닐 수 있다. 즉, 하나의 APN(PDN)을 운용 시 듀얼 스택(듀얼 주소를 가지는 단일의 PDN 연결) PDN이나 각각 단일의 주소를 가지는 2개의 PDN 연결로 사업자가 운영하지 않을 가능성이 크다.However, in this case, the operator may have a burden of operating two pools of IP addresses, which may not be a practical solution. In other words, when operating one APN (PDN), there is a high possibility that operators do not operate with dual stack (single PDN connection with dual address) PDN or two PDN connections with each single address.
이에 따라, 앞서 표 2와 같이 사업자가 운용하는 IMS PDN의 경우 IPv6 주소를 할당하고, 인터넷(Internet) PDN의 경우 IPv6를 지원하지 않는 어플리케이션과의 하위 호환성(backward compatibility)를 위해 IPv4 주소를 할당하는 조합으로 IP 버전 운영이 가능하다. Accordingly, as shown in Table 2, an IPv6 address is allocated to an IMS PDN operated by an operator and an IPv4 address is allocated for backward compatibility with an application that does not support IPv6 in an Internet PDN. Combination IP version operation is possible.
하지만 초기 네트워크 운영 시 IPv6 전환이 안정화 되기 전까지 여러 가지 이유로 인해 IPv6 운영 장애가 발생할 수 있다. 이에 따라, 실질적인 네트워크 운영 중 IPv6 장애 시 안정적으로 동작하는 IPv4로의 회귀/폴백(Fallback)하는 동작이 필요하다. 즉, P-GW에서 할당하는 IPv4과 IPv6에 따라 단말에 할당하는 IP 주소가 상이하며, IPv4로 폴백한다는 것은 IPv4 주소를 단말에 재할당한다는 것이다. However, for various reasons, IPv6 operational failure may occur until the initial network operation is stabilized. Accordingly, there is a need for an operation of returning to / falling back to IPv4 which is stable when an IPv6 failure occurs during actual network operation. That is, IP addresses allocated to UEs are different according to IPv4 and IPv6 allocated by P-GW, and falling back to IPv4 means that an IPv4 address is reassigned to a UE.
기존에는 IPv6 장애가 발생시 사업자는 네트워크 부하를 분산하기 위해 순차적으로 가입자의 IP 주소를 IPv4로 폴백시키는 작업을 수행한다. 예를 들어, 800만 정도의 가입자를 둔 경우 모든 가입자의 IP 주소를 IPv4로 재할당 하는데 수시간(예를 들어, 3 시간)이 걸릴 수 있다. 즉, IPv6 장애 발생 후 랜덤하게 가입자를 IPv4로 다시 할당하는 경우, 경우에 따라 특정 단말은 최대 3시간 동안 서비스 장애를 겪을 수 있다. 특히 음성(Voice) 서비스를 지원하는 IMS 네트워크의 경우 이러한 서비스 장애는 많은 단말의 전화 착신/발신이 불가능한 상황(예를 들어, 콜 손실(call loss))을 초래하여 사업자 서비스에 큰 영향을 줄 수 있다. 이에 IPv6 장애 발생시 특히 음성 콜 서비스의 서비스가 가능한 한 원활하게 서비스를 제공할 수 있는 방법이 필요하다.In the past, when an IPv6 failure occurs, the operator sequentially falls back the subscriber's IP address to IPv4 to distribute the network load. For example, if you have about 8 million subscribers, it can take hours (
이에 따라, 본 발명에서는 PDN의 PDN 타입 조합별로 폴백(Fall back) 방식을 판단하는 기준 및 해당 동작을 제안하고자 한다.Accordingly, the present invention proposes a criterion for determining a fall back scheme for each PDN type combination of the PDN and a corresponding operation thereof.
본 발명은 크게 다음이 두 가지 구성을 제안한다.The present invention largely proposes the following two configurations.
1. 먼저, 사업자의 PDN 별 IP 버전 구성에 따라 IPv6 장애 발생 시 IPv4로 폴백(fallback)하는 두 가지 방법 중 하나를 선택하는 방법을 제안한다. First, we propose a method to select one of two methods of falling back to IPv4 when an IPv6 failure occurs according to the IP version configuration of each provider's PDN.
즉, IPv6 운영에 장애가 발생된 경우, HSS는 단말에 확립된 PDN 연결 중에서 IPv6가 할당된 PDN 연결을 확인함으로써 HSS 개시 디태치 및 재-어태치(HSS initiated detach and reattach) 절차, 그리고 HSS 요청 PDN 단절 및 재-연결(HSS requested PDN disconnection and reconnection) 절차 중에서 어느 절차를 진행할 지 결정한다. That is, in case of a failure in IPv6 operation, the HSS checks the PDN connection allocated to the IPv6 among the PDN connections established in the terminal, thereby performing an HSS initiated detach and reattach procedure and an HSS request PDN. Determine whether to proceed with the HSS requested PDN disconnection and reconnection procedure.
2. 그리고, 1. 번에서 언급하는 선택에 따라 다음과 같이 두 가지의 IPv4 폴백 방식을 제안한다. 2. And, based on the choice mentioned in
A. HSS 개시 디태치 및 재-어태치(HSS initiated detach and reattach)A. HSS initiated detach and reattach
B. HSS 요청 PDN 단절 및 재-연결(HSS requested PDN disconnection and reconnection)B. HSS requested PDN disconnection and reconnection
일반적으로 IMS 음성(voice) 서비스를 지원하는 단말의 경우, 인터넷 PDN과 IMS PDN이 설정된다. In general, for a terminal supporting an IMS voice service, an Internet PDN and an IMS PDN are set.
두 개의 PDN에 대해서 단말과 사업자 성능(capability)에 따라 IPv4, IPv6, IPv4v6 주소 할당이 가능하다. For two PDNs, IPv4, IPv6, and IPv4v6 addresses can be allocated according to UE and operator capabilities.
다만, 사업자 정책에 따라 두 PDN에 동일한 IP 버전 할당될 수도 있고 각각 다른 IP 버전이 할당될 수도 있다. However, the same IP version may be allocated to the two PDNs or different IP versions may be allocated according to the operator policy.
이에 따라, 본 발명에서는 사업자 PDN IP 버전 할당에 따라 아래와 같은 형태로 IPv4 폴백 방식을 선택하는 방법을 제안한다. Accordingly, the present invention proposes a method of selecting an IPv4 fallback scheme according to the operator PDN IP version assignment in the following form.
표 3은 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따른 IP 주소 할당 방법을 예시하는 표이다. Table 3 is a table illustrating an IP address allocation method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
표 3을 참조하면, HSS는 단말에게 확립된 PDN 연결 중에서 IPv6 장애로 인하여 어떠한 PDN 연결이 문제가 발생되었는지 판단함으로써, 2개의 PDN 연결(즉, PDN 1 및 PDN 2에 대한 PDN 연결)에 대하여 문제가 생겼다고 판단하면 HSS 개시 재-어태치가 수반된 디태치(HSS initiated Detach with re-attach) 절차가 진행될 수 있다. Referring to Table 3, the HSS determines which PDN connection is a problem due to an IPv6 failure among PDN connections established to the UE, thereby causing problems for two PDN connections (that is, PDN connection to
반면, HSS가 IPv6 장애로 인하여 PDN 1 및 PDN 2에 대한 PDN 연결 하나만 문제가 생겼다고 판단하면, 무시(Negligible)하거나 HSS 요청 PDN 단절(HSS requested PDN disconnection) 절차가 진행될 수 있다. On the other hand, if the HSS determines that only one PDN connection to
보다 구체적으로 살펴보면, 기존에는 가입 철회(Subscription withdrawal)의 원인(cause)을 제외하고, 위치 취소(Cancel Location) 메시지를 통해 HSS 개시 디태치(HSS initiated Detach) 절차의 진행이 수행이 불가능하였다. In more detail, in the past, except for the cause of subscription withdrawal, the progress of the HSS initiated detach procedure cannot be performed through a Cancel Location message.
다만, 위의 표 3과 같이 두 개의 PDN이 모두 IPv6로 IP 주소를 운용할 경우 IPv6 장애 발생시 단말의 디태치(Detach) 후 재-어태치(re-attach)를 통해 IPv4로의 폴백이 가능하다. However, as shown in Table 3 above, when both PDNs operate IP addresses as IPv6, fallback to IPv4 is possible through re-attach after detach of the terminal when IPv6 failure occurs.
이와 같이, 디태치 절차가 진행된다면, 이후 단말은 어태치 절차를 통해 PDN 연결을 다시 맺어야 한다. 그리고, 이 과정 중에 P-GW는 해당 단말에 IP 주소를 다시 할당해야 하며, P-GW 판단 시 IPv6를 더 이상 사용할 수 없으면 IPv4를 다시 할당하게 되므로, 단말은 할당 받은 IPv4를 이용하여 IMS(IP Multimedia Subsystem) 등록(registration)을 통해 다시 정상적인 통신이 가능하다. As such, if the detach procedure is performed, the terminal must re-establish the PDN connection through the attach procedure. And, during this process, the P-GW must reassign the IP address to the corresponding terminal. If the IPv6 is no longer available when the P-GW is determined, the P-GW reassigns the IPv4. Multimedia communication enables normal communication again through registration.
하지만, 두 개의 PDN 중 하나만 IPv6를 사용할 경우 단말을 디태치(Detach)시키는 방법 보다는 장애 상황이 발생한 PDN(APN)만을 단절(disconnection)시킨 후 재활성화(reactivation)해서 IPv4로의 폴백이 가능하다. 즉, IPv6 장애가 발생된 PDN 연결은 1개이고, 단말이 여러 개의 PDN 연결을 확립하고 있는 경우, 문제가 있는 PDN 연결만 단절(disconnection)한 후 다시 연결을 맺으면 충분하다. 이 경우에도 해당 단말에 대하여 디태치 절차가 수행되면, 단말은 다른 PDN 연결도(즉, 문제가 없는 PDN 연결 포함) 모두 끊어진 후 다시 맺어져야 한다. However, if only one of the two PDNs uses IPv6, it is possible to fall back to IPv4 by disconnecting and reactivating only the PDN (APN) where a failure situation occurs rather than detaching the terminal. That is, if there is one PDN connection in which an IPv6 failure occurs, and the UE establishes several PDN connections, it is sufficient to disconnect and reconnect only the PDN in question. Even in this case, if the detach procedure is performed for the terminal, the terminal should be re-connected after disconnecting all other PDN connections (that is, including PDN connection without problem).
이에 따라, 본 발명에서는 두 가지 IPv4로의 폴백을 위한 절차를 제안한다.Accordingly, the present invention proposes two procedures for falling back to IPv4.
즉, IPv6가 장애가 발생된 경우, HSS 개시 디태치(Detach) 및 재-어태치(Re-Attach) 절차(이하, 'HSS 개시 재-어태치가 수반된 디태치(HSS initiated Detach with re-attach) 절차'로 통칭함)와 IPv6 장애가 발생된 특정 PDN에 대하여 HSS 요청 PDN 단절(PDN disconnection) 및 재-연결(reconnection) 절차(이하, 'HSS 요청 재-연결이 수반된 PDN 단절(HSS requested PDN disconnection with re-connection) 절차'로 통칭함)를 제안한다. That is, when IPv6 fails, HSS initiated Detach and Re-attach procedure (hereinafter referred to as' HSS initiated Detach with re-attach) Procedure ') and HSS request PDN disconnection and reconnection procedures (hereinafter referred to as' HSS requested PDN disconnection with HSS request reconnection') for specific PDNs that have an IPv6 failure. collectively referred to as the "with re-connection" procedure.
나아가, 본 발명에서는 HSS가 단말에게 확립된 PDN 연결 중에서 IPv6 장애로 인하여 어떠한 PDN 연결이 문제가 발생되었는지 판단함으로써, 위의 2가지의 절차 중에서 어떠한 절차를 진행할 지 결정하는 방법을 제안한다. Furthermore, the present invention proposes a method of determining which procedure to proceed among the above two procedures by determining which PDN connection is a problem due to an IPv6 failure among PDN connections established to the UE.
또한, 추가적으로 IMS 음성 수신 호/발신 호가 있는 단말을 우선적인 처리하기 위하여, HSS에서 IMS 음성 콜 수신이 인지된 단말을 우선하여 IPv4 폴백을 처리하는 방법을 제안한다. In addition, in order to preferentially process a terminal having an IMS voice reception call / outgoing call, a method of processing an IPv4 fallback by giving priority to a terminal recognized for receiving an IMS voice call in the HSS is proposed.
이를 위해, 우선 HSS에서 단말 별로 각각 PDN에 따른 IP 버전(실질적으로 할당한 IP 주소의 버전)을 단말 어태치(Attach) 절차 및 PDN 연결(PDN connectivity) 절차 시 통지 요청(Notify Request) 메시지 전송 등의 절차를 통해 가입 정보(subscription information)에 저장할 수 있다. 그리고, IPv6 혹은 특정 PDN 타입의 장애 발생시 이 정보를 이용해 사업자가 개별 단말에 대해 순차적으로 HSS 요청 PDN 단절(HSS requested PDN disconnection) 혹은 HSS 개시 재-어태치와 함께 디태치(HSS initiated Detach with re-attach)를 수행할 수 있다. To this end, first, the HSS transmits a Notify Request message during an attach procedure and a PDN connectivity procedure of an IP version according to a PDN for each UE. It can be stored in subscription information through the procedure of. In case of a failure of IPv6 or a specific PDN type, the provider uses this information to sequentially detach the HSS requested PDN disconnection or HSS initiated Detach with re-attach to individual terminals. attach).
한편, 앞서 표 3에서는 설명의 편의를 위해 인터넷 PDN과 IMS PDN 만을 예시하고 있으나, 본 발명에서는 이와 다른 PDN과 단말이 연결될 수 있음은 물론이다. Meanwhile, in Table 3 above, only Internet PDN and IMS PDN are illustrated for convenience of description, but in the present invention, other PDNs and terminals may be connected.
결국, 본 발명에 따르면, 특정 PDN 타입에 대하여 장애가 발생된 경우, 단말에 확립된 모든 PDN 연결에 대한 PDN 타입이 장애가 발생된 PDN 타입인 경우 HSS 개시 재-어태치(re-attach)가 수반된 디태치(detach) 절차가 수행될 수 있으며, 그렇지 않은 경우 장애가 발생된 PDN 타입이 할당된 특정 PDN 연결에 대하여 HSS 요청 재-연결(reconnection)이 수반된 PDN 단절(PDN disconnection) 절차가 수행될 수 있다. After all, according to the present invention, when a failure occurs for a specific PDN type, when the PDN type for all PDN connections established in the terminal is a failed PDN type, an HSS initiation re-attach is accompanied. Detach procedure may be performed, otherwise PDN disconnection procedure with HSS request reconnection may be performed for a specific PDN connection assigned a failed PDN type. have.
이하, 본 발명의 설명에 있어서, HPLMN(Home PLMN)에 속한 P-GW에서 IPv6를 사용하지 못한다고 운영자(operator)가 판단한 경우를 가정한다. 즉, 운영 및 유지(O&M: Operation and Maintenance) 등에 의해 HPLMN에 속한 노드들(MME, HSS, S-GW, P-GW 등)은 특정 PDN 연결을 위해 할당된 IPv6를 사용하지 못한다고 이미 알고 있다고 가정한다. In the following description of the present invention, it is assumed that an operator determines that IPv6 cannot be used in a P-GW belonging to a home PLMN (HPLMN). That is, it is assumed that nodes belonging to the HPLMN (MME, HSS, S-GW, P-GW, etc.) by Operation and Maintenance (O & M) already know that they do not use the IPv6 allocated for the specific PDN connection. do.
또한, 이하 본 발명의 설명에 있어서, HSS는 통지 요청(Notify Request) 메시지 등을 통해 단말에게 할성화된(할당된) PDN 타입을 알고 있다고 가정한다. In addition, in the following description of the present invention, it is assumed that the HSS knows a PDN type assigned to the terminal through a Notify Request message or the like.
앞서 설명한 바와 같이, HSS가 PDN 타입 폴백 방법을 선택하기 위해서는 PDN 연결 별로 할당된 PDN 타입(즉, IP 버전)을 알아야 할 필요가 있다. 이에 대하여 아래 도면을 참조하여 설명한다. As described above, in order for the HSS to select the PDN type fallback method, it is necessary to know the PDN type (ie, IP version) allocated for each PDN connection. This will be described with reference to the drawings below.
도 13은 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따른 HSS에게 PDN 타입을 알려주기 위한 방법을 예시하는 도면이다. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a method for informing a HSS of a PDN type according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG.
특정 PDN 타입에 대한 문제 인식(즉, 운영자 설정에 의해) 시 복구 작업을 시작할 것이며, 일례로 MME가 전체 단말을 순차적으로 디태치 후 재-어태치(또는 PDN 단절 및 재-연결) 시킬 수 있다. 다만, 이러한 복구 작업은 MME 및 네트워크 로드에 영향을 최소화 하는 범위에서 일어나야 할 것이고 이에 모든 가입자들의 PDN 타입 폴백을 위해서 상당히 많은 시간이 걸릴 수 있다. When a problem is recognized (ie, by operator setting) for a specific PDN type, a recovery operation will be started. For example, the MME may detach and reattach (or PDN disconnect and re-connect) all terminals sequentially. . However, this recovery operation should occur in a range that minimizes the impact on the MME and network load, and it may take a considerable time for PDN type fallback of all subscribers.
따라서, 본 발명에서는 이러한 복구 작업이 수행되는 중에, 음성 콜(voice call) 송수신의 서비스 간섭을 최소화하기 위하여 HSS단에서 이러한 단말을 우선시해서 복구를 수행하는 방법을 제안한다. 즉, HSS가 이미 복구 작업 중인 것을 인지한 상태에서 음성 콜(voice call) 송수신을 인지한 경우, 해당 단말의 PDN 타입 폴백이 필요한지 여부를 알아야 하는데 현재 MME는 단말에 실질적으로 할당된 PDN 타입을 알고 있으나, HSS는 알지 못한다. 따라서, PDN 연결 확립 시 HSS에도 단말에 할당된 PDN 타입에 대한 정보를 가지고 있어야 할 필요가 있다. Accordingly, the present invention proposes a method for performing recovery by prioritizing such a terminal in the HSS terminal in order to minimize service interference of voice call transmission and reception while such recovery operation is performed. That is, if the HSS recognizes that the voice call transmission and reception while recognizing that the recovery operation is already in progress, it is necessary to know whether the PDN type fallback of the corresponding UE is required. The current MME knows the PDN type actually assigned to the UE. However, the HSS is not known. Therefore, when establishing a PDN connection, the HSS needs to have information on the PDN type allocated to the UE.
도 13을 참조하면, 단말은 MME에게 어태치 요청(Attach Request) 메시지 또는 PDN 연결 요청(PDN Connectivity Request) 메시지를 전송함으로써 어태치(Attach) 절차 또는 단말 요청 PDN 연결 절차(UE requested PDN connectivity) 절차를 개시한다(S1301). 즉, 앞서 도 11 및 도 12에 따른 절차가 진행된다(S1302).Referring to FIG. 13, the UE transmits an attach request message or a PDN connectivity request message to an MME, and then attach or UE request PDN connectivity procedure. To start (S1301). That is, the procedure according to FIG. 11 and FIG. 12 is performed before (S1302).
어태치(Attach) 절차 또는 단말 요청 PDN 연결 절차(UE requested PDN connectivity) 절차 중에, MME는 통지 요청(Notify Request) 메시지 내에 해당 단말에 대하여 활성화된(할당된) PDN 타입(active PDN type) 정보를 포함시켜 HSS에게 전송한다(S1303).During the Attach procedure or UE requested PDN connectivity procedure, the MME sends active PDN type information (active) assigned to the UE in the Notify Request message. Include and transmit to the HSS (S1303).
이러한 과정을 통해 HSS는 단말의 PDN 연결 별로(또는 PDN(APN) 별로) 활성화된(할당된) PDN 타입을 알 수 있다. Through this process, the HSS can know the activated (assigned) PDN type for each PDN connection (or for each PDN (APN)) of the UE.
아래 표 4는 어태치 절차(도 11 참조) 및 PDN 연결 확립 절차(도 12 참조)의 통지 요청 절차(Notify Request procedure)를 통해 MME가 PDN 마다 설정된 PDN 타입을 HSS에게 알려주는 경우, HSS 내 정보 필드(information field)를 예시한다. Table 4 below shows information in the HSS when the MME informs the HSS of the PDN type set for each PDN through the attach request procedure (see FIG. 11) and the Notify Request procedure of the PDN connection establishment procedure (see FIG. 12). Illustrates an information field.
표 4를 참조하면, HSS는 각각의 활성화된 PDN 연결에 대하여 할당된 PDN 타입을 저장할 수 있다. Referring to Table 4, the HSS may store an allocated PDN type for each activated PDN connection.
이하, 설명의 편의를 위해 PDN 타입을 IPv4, IPv6, IPv4v6를 예시하여 설명하나, 이와 상이한 PDN 타입에 대하여도 본 발명이 동일하게 적용될 수 있음은 물론이다. Hereinafter, for convenience of description, the PDN type will be described by exemplifying IPv4, IPv6, and IPv4v6, but the present invention can be applied to the same PDN type.
1) HSS 개시 재-어태치를 수반된 디태치(HSS initiated Detach with re-attach) 절차1) HSS initiated Detach with re-attach procedure
도 14는 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따른 PDN 타입 폴백 방법을 예시하는 도면이다. 14 is a diagram illustrating a PDN type fallback method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
사업자가 운영하는 모든 PDN이 IPv6로 운영 중에 IPv6 장애가 발생된 경우, 재-어태치가 수반된 디태치(Detach with re-attach) 절차를 통해 IPv4로의 fallback을 수행할 수 있다. If all PDNs operated by the service provider have an IPv6 failure while operating with IPv6, fallback to IPv4 can be performed through the Detach with re-attach procedure.
또한, 사업자가 운영하는 일부 PDN이 IPv6로 운영 중에 IPv6 장애가 발생된 경우라도, 특정 단말의 PDN 연결이 모두 IPv6로 셋업된 경우, HSS는 해당 단말에 대하여 재-어태치를 수반된 디태치(Detach with re-attach) 절차를 통해 IPv4로의 fallback을 수행할 수 있다.In addition, even if some PDNs operated by the service provider have an IPv6 failure while operating with IPv6, when all PDN connections of a specific terminal are set up as IPv6, the HSS is detached with a reattachment for the corresponding terminal. Fallback to IPv4 can be performed through the re-attach procedure.
이 경우, MME는 해당 PDN 연결을 가지는 모든 단말을 순차적으로 MME 개시 재-어태치가 수반된 디태치(MME initiated Detach with re-attach) 절차를 진행할 수 있다. In this case, the MME may proceed with the MME initiated Detach with re-attach procedure sequentially involving all terminals having a corresponding PDN connection.
다시 말해, MME는 모든 PDN 연결에 대해서 IPv6를 할당 받는 단말들을 대상으로 순차적으로 재-어태치가 수반된 디태치(Detach with re-attach) 절차를 개시한다. In other words, the MME initiates a Detach with re-attach procedure that sequentially involves re-attachment for terminals allocated to IPv6 for all PDN connections.
여기서, 본 발명에 따르면, HSS가 특정 단말(도 14의 경우, 단말 A)의 송/수신 콜을 인지하면, 해당 단말에 대해서 우선적으로 HSS 개시 재-어태치가 수반된 디태치(HSS initiated Detach with re-attach) 절차를 진행한다. According to the present invention, when the HSS recognizes a transmission / reception call of a specific terminal (terminal A in FIG. 14), the HSS initiated Detach with the HSS initiated reattachment is preferentially performed for the terminal. proceed with the re-attach procedure.
도 14를 참조하면, HSS는 IPv6가 장애(failure)가 발생하였음을 감지(detection)(네트워크 운영자(사업자)의 설정에 의해)한다(S1401).Referring to FIG. 14, the HSS detects (by setting of a network operator (operator)) that IPv6 has failed (S1401).
이후 앞서 설명한 바와 같이, MME에 의해 IPv6 장애로 인해 IPv4 fallback 절차가 진행될 수 있다. Thereafter, as described above, the IPv4 fallback procedure may be performed due to the IPv6 failure by the MME.
HSS가 단말(도 14의 경우, 단말 A)로의 IMS 수신 콜(incoming IMS call)를 인지하면, 수신 콜을 받을 단말을 우선하여 IPv4 주소 할당을 위한 HSS 개시 재-어태치가 수반된 디태치(HSS initiated Detach procedure with Re-attach) 절차를 개시하고(S1402), HSS는 해당 단말(단말 A)의 식별자(예를 들어, IMSI)와 원인 값(또는 취소 타입(cancellation type))을 포함하는 위치 취소(Cancel Location) 메시지를 MME에게 전송한다(S1403).If the HSS recognizes an incoming IMS call to the terminal (terminal A in FIG. 14), the HSS initiated re-attach for IPv4 address assignment is given to the terminal to receive the received call. initiated Detach procedure with Re-attach (S1402), the HSS cancels the location including the identifier (e.g., IMSI) and the cause value (or cancellation type) of the terminal (terminal A). The message (Cancel Location) is transmitted to the MME (S1403).
도 14에서는 단말 A로의 수신 콜만을 예시하고 있으나, 단말 A로부터의 발신 콜이 발생된 경우에도 동일하게 단말 A을 우선하여 재-어태치가 수반된 디태치(Detach procedure with Re-attach) 절차가 진행될 수 있다. In FIG. 14, only an incoming call to UE A is illustrated, but even when an outgoing call from UE A is generated, a Detach procedure with Re-attach procedure may be performed by prioritizing UE A in the same manner. Can be.
HSS는 먼저 송/수신 콜이 발생된 단말이 모든 PDN 연결에 대해서 IPv6를 할당 받았는지 판단할 수 있다. 그리고, 해당 단말이 모든 PDN 연결에 대해서 IPv6를 할당 받은 경우, HSS는 해당 단말의 IPv4 폴백을 위해 재-어태치가 수반된 디태치(Detach procedure with Re-attach) 절차를 진행할 수 있다. The HSS may first determine whether the terminal where the transmit / receive call is made is allocated IPv6 for all PDN connections. And, if the UE is assigned IPv6 for all PDN connections, the HSS may proceed with a Detach procedure with Re-attach for the IPv4 fallback of the UE.
본 발명에서는 IP 버전 변경 등 장애상황을 처리하기 위하여 HSS 개시 디태치 절차 절차가 수행될 수 있도록 새로운 원인(new cause)을 제안한다. In the present invention, a new cause is proposed so that an HSS initiation detach procedure can be performed to deal with a failure situation such as an IP version change.
위치 취소(Cancel Location) 메시지는 해당 단말(단말 A)의 식별자(예를 들어, IMSI)와 원인 값(또는 취소 타입(cancellation type))으로 'HSS 개시 디태치(HSS initiated detach)' 혹은 'IP 버전 변경(IP version change)' 혹은 'PDN 타입 변경(PDN type change)' 등을 포함할 수 있다. The Cancel Location message is a 'HSS initiated detach' or 'IP' as an identifier (eg IMSI) and cause value (or cancellation type) of the terminal (terminal A). IP version change 'or' PDN type change '.
또한, 위치 취소(Cancel Location) 메시지는 해당 단말의 재-어태치를 지시하기 위한 재-어태치(re-attach) 지시 정보를 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 위치 취소(Cancel Location) 메시지의 디태치 타입(Detach type)이 재-어태치 요구('Re-attached required')로 설정될 수 있다. Also, the Cancel Location message may include re-attach indication information for indicating a re-attachment of the corresponding terminal. For example, the Detach type of the Cancel Location message may be set as a 'Re-attached required'.
MME는 디태치 요청(Detach request) 메시지를 단말에게 전송한다(S1404).The MME transmits a detach request message to the terminal (S1404).
이때, MME는 HSS로부터 위치 취소(Cancel Location) 메시지를 수신하면, 해당 단말에 대하여 다른 단말보다 우선시하여 디태치 요청(Detach request) 메시지를 전송할 수 있다. In this case, when the MME receives a Cancel Location message from the HSS, the MME may transmit a Detach request message with priority over other terminals for the corresponding terminal.
디태치 요청(Detach request) 메시지는 재-어태치(re-attach) 지시 정보를 포함한다. 예를 들어, 디태치 요청(Detach request) 메시지의 디태치 타입(Detach type)이 재-어태치 요구('Re-attached required')로 설정될 수 있다. The Detach request message includes re-attach indication information. For example, a detach type of a detach request message may be set as a 're-attached required'.
또한, 디태치 요청(Detach request) 메시지는 원인 값으로 'HSS 개시 디태치(HSS initiated detach)' 혹은 'IP 버전 변경(IP version change)' 혹은 'PDN 타입 변경(PDN type change)' 등을 포함할 수 있다. In addition, the detach request message may include 'HSS initiated detach' or 'IP version change' or 'PDN type change' as a cause value. can do.
만약, 단말이 ECM-IDLE 상태인 경우, 페이징 전송을 통해 단말을 ECM-CONNECTED 상태로 전환 시킨 후, 디태치 요청(Detach request) 메시지를 단말에게 전송할 수 있다. If the terminal is in the ECM-IDLE state, after switching the terminal to the ECM-CONNECTED state through paging transmission, it may transmit a Detach request (Detach request) message to the terminal.
MME로부터 디태치 요청(Detach request) 메시지를 수신한 단말은 EPS 베어러 컨텍스트를 삭제한다. The terminal that receives the Detach request message from the MME deletes the EPS bearer context.
MME는 SGW에게 세션 삭제 요청(Delete Session Request) 메시지를 전송한다(S1405).The MME transmits a Delete Session Request message to the SGW (S1405).
세션 삭제 요청(Delete Session Request) 메시지는 EPS 베어러 ID 등을 포함할 수 있으며, MME는 세션 삭제 요청(Delete Session Request) 메시지 전송 후 해당 단말의 EPS 베어러 컨텍스트 정보를 삭제한다. The Delete Session Request message may include an EPS bearer ID and the like, and the MME deletes EPS bearer context information of the corresponding UE after transmitting a Delete Session Request message.
SGW는 MME로부터 수신한 세션 삭제 요청(Delete Session Request) 메시지를 PGW에게 전송한다(S1406).The SGW transmits a Delete Session Request message received from the MME to the PGW (S1406).
SGW는 세션 삭제 요청(Delete Session Request) 메시지 전송 후 해당 단말의 EPS 베어러 컨텍스트 정보를 삭제한다. The SGW deletes the EPS bearer context information of the terminal after transmitting a Delete Session Request message.
PGW는 S1406 단계의 세션 삭제 요청(Delete Session Request) 메시지에 대한 응답으로 세션 삭제 응답(Delete Session Response) 메시지를 SGW에게 전송한다(S1407).The PGW transmits a Delete Session Response message to the SGW in response to the Delete Session Request message in step S1406 (S1407).
SGW는 세션 삭제 응답(Delete Session Response) 메시지 전송 후 해당 단말의 EPS 베어러 컨텍스트 정보를 삭제한다. The SGW deletes EPS bearer context information of the UE after transmitting a Delete Session Response message.
SGW는 S1405 단계의 세션 삭제 요청(Delete Session Request) 메시지에 대한 응답으로 세션 삭제 응답(Delete Session Response) 메시지를 MME에게 전송한다(S1408).The SGW transmits a Delete Session Response message to the MME in response to the Delete Session Request message in step S1405 (S1408).
단말은 S1404 단계 이후 디태치가 성공적으로 수행되면, S1404 단계의 디태치 요청(Detach request) 메시지에 대한 응답으로 디태치 승인(Detach Accept) 메시지를 MME에게 전송한다(S1409).If the detach is successfully performed after the step S1404, the terminal transmits a detach accept message to the MME in response to the detach request message of the step S1404 (S1409).
도 14에서는 도시되지 않았으나, MME가 단말로부터 디태치 승인(Detach Accept) 메시지를 수신하면, MME는 HSS에게 위치 취소 응답(Cancel Location Answer) 메시지를 전송할 수 있다. 여기서, 위치 취소 응답(Cancel Location Answer) 메시지는 단말의 식별자(예를 들어, 단말의 IMSI)를 포함할 수 있다. Although not shown in FIG. 14, when the MME receives a Detach Accept message from the UE, the MME may transmit a Cancel Location Answer message to the HSS. Here, the Cancel Location Answer message may include an identifier of the terminal (eg, IMSI of the terminal).
그리고, 단말, 기지국 및 MME는 시그널링 해제(Signaling release) 절차를 수행한다(S1410).The terminal, the base station, and the MME perform a signaling release procedure (S1410).
보다 구체적으로 살펴보면, MME는 S1 시그널링을 해제하기 위하여 기지국에게 단말 컨텍스트 해제 명령(UE Context Release Command) 메시지를 전송한다. 기지국은 아직 해당 단말의 RRC 연결이 설정되어 있는 경우, RRC 연결을 해제하기 위하여 단말에게 RRC 연결 해제(RRC Connection Release) 메시지를 전송하고, 해당 단말과 관련된 정보를 삭제한다. 그리고, 기지국은 단말 컨텍스트 해제 명령(UE Context Release Command) 메시지에 대한 응답으로 단말 컨텍스트 해제 완료(UE Context Release Complete) 메시지를 MME에게 전송한다. In more detail, the MME transmits a UE context release command message to the base station to release S1 signaling. If the RRC connection of the terminal is still established, the base station transmits an RRC connection release message to the terminal in order to release the RRC connection, and deletes information associated with the terminal. The base station transmits a UE context release complete message to the MME in response to the UE context release command message.
앞서 디태치 요청(Detach request) 메시지가 재-어태치(re-attach) 지시 정보를 포함하므로, 단말은 즉시 어태치(Attach) 절차를 수행한다. 즉, 단말은 앞서 도 11에서 예시된 어태치(Attach) 절차를 개시한다. Since the Detach request message includes re-attach indication information, the UE immediately performs an attach procedure. That is, the terminal initiates the attach procedure illustrated in FIG. 11.
이 경우, IMS 수신 콜의 신속한 처리를 위해 어태치 요청(Attach request) 메시지에 이를 명시하는 지시(예를 들어, 원인 또는 지시)를 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 어태치 요청(Attach request) 메시지는 원인 값으로 '모바일 발신 진행(Mobile Originated progressed)', 'IP 버전 변경(IP version change)' 혹은 'PDN 타입 변경(PDN type change)' 등을 포함할 수 있다.In this case, an instruction (for example, cause or indication) indicating this may be included in an attach request message for prompt processing of the IMS received call. For example, the attach request message may include a mobile originated progressed, an IP version change, or a PDN type change as the cause value. It may include.
이를 통해 MME에서 혼잡(congestion) 시에도 해당 단말의 어태치 절차를 우선시 하여 처리할 수 있도록 한다.Through this, even in congestion in the MME, the attach procedure of the corresponding terminal may be given priority.
이후, 단말은 어태치 절차를 통해 IPv4 address를 할당 받는다. 즉, P-GW는 IPv6가 장애가 발생되었음을 이미 알고 있으므로, 해당 단말에게 IPv4 주소를 할당하게 된다. 이후, 단말은 IMS 수신 호를 성공적으로 처리할 수 있다.Thereafter, the terminal is assigned an IPv4 address through an attach procedure. That is, since the P-GW already knows that an IPv6 failure occurs, the P-GW allocates an IPv4 address to the corresponding UE. Thereafter, the terminal may successfully process the IMS reception call.
한편, 도 14에서는 본 발명을 명확히 설명하기 위하여 디태치(Detach) 절차를 간략히 예시하고 있으며, 도 14에서 도시되지 않은 다른 절차 혹은 다른 노드가 더 추가될 수 있다. Meanwhile, FIG. 14 briefly illustrates a detach procedure in order to clearly describe the present invention, and another procedure or another node not shown in FIG. 14 may be further added.
2) HSS 요청 재-활성(또는 재-연결)이 수반된 PDN 단절(HSS requested PDN disconnection with reactivation) 절차2) HSS requested PDN disconnection with reactivation procedure with HSS request re-activation (or re-connection)
도 15는 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따른 PDN 타입 폴백 방법을 예시하는 도면이다.15 is a diagram illustrating a PDN type fallback method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
사업자가 운영하는 PDN 중에 일부만이 IPv6로 운영 중에 IPv6 장애가 발생된 경우, 단말의 디태치 대신에 IPv6로 셋업(setup)된 PDN 연결에 대해서만 재-활성(또는 재-연결)이 수반된 PDN 단절(PDN disconnection with reactivation) 절차를 통해 IPv4로의 fallback을 수행함으로써, 보다 간단하게 IPv6 장애 문제를 해결할 수 있다. If only some of the PDNs operated by the service provider have an IPv6 failure while operating with IPv6, PDN disconnection involving re-activation (or re-connection) only for PDN connections set up with IPv6 instead of the terminal attachment ( By performing fallback to IPv4 through PDN disconnection with reactivation procedure, IPv6 failure problem can be solved more simply.
이 경우, MME는 IPv6로 할당이 되어있는 PDN에 대하여, 해당 PDN과 연결을 가지는 모든 단말을 순차적으로 MME 요청 재-활성이 수반된 PDN 단절(MME requested PDN disconnection with reactivation) 절차를 진행할 수 있다. In this case, the MME may proceed with MME requested PDN disconnection with reactivation procedure for all terminals having a connection with the corresponding PDN sequentially with respect to the PDN assigned with IPv6.
다시 말해, MME는 일부 PDN 연결에 대해서만 IPv6를 할당 받는 단말들을 대상으로 순차적으로 재-활성(또는 재-연결)이 수반된 PDN 단절(PDN disconnection with reactivation) 절차를 개시한다. In other words, the MME initiates a PDN disconnection with reactivation procedure in which re-activation (or re-connection) is sequentially performed for terminals allocated to IPv6 only for some PDN connections.
여기서, 본 발명에 따르면, HSS가 특정 단말(도 15의 경우, 단말 A)로 송/수신 콜을 인지하면, 해당 단말에 대해서 우선적으로 HSS 요청 재-활성(또는 재-연결)이 수반된 PDN 단절(HSS requested PDN disconnection with reactivation) 절차를 진행한다. Here, according to the present invention, when the HSS recognizes a transmission / reception call to a specific terminal (terminal A, in the case of FIG. 15), PDN accompanied with the HSS request re-activation (or re-connection) for the terminal Proceed with the HSS requested PDN disconnection with reactivation procedure.
도 15를 참조하면, HSS는 IPv6가 장애(failure)가 발생하였음을 감지(detection)(네트워크 운영자(사업자)의 설정에 의해)한다(S1501). Referring to FIG. 15, the HSS detects (by setting of a network operator (operator)) that IPv6 has failed (S1501).
이후 앞서 설명한 바와 같이, MME에 의해 IPv6 장애로 인해 IPv4 fallback 절차가 진행될 수 있다. Thereafter, as described above, the IPv4 fallback procedure may be performed due to the IPv6 failure by the MME.
HSS가 단말(도 15의 경우, 단말 A)로의 IMS 수신 콜(incoming IMS call)를 인지하면, 수신 콜을 받을 단말을 우선하여 IPv4 주소 할당을 위한 HSS 요청 재-활성이 수반된 단절(HSS requested PDN disconnection with reactivation) 절차를 개시하고(S1502), HSS는 해당 단말(단말 A)의 식별자(예를 들어, IMSI)와 PDN 식별자(APN)을 포함하는 위치 취소(Cancel Location) 메시지 또는 PDN 단절 요청(PDN disconnection request) 메시지를 MME에게 전송한다(S1503).If the HSS recognizes an incoming IMS call to the terminal (terminal A in FIG. 15), the HSS requested re-activation for IPv4 address assignment by prioritizing the terminal to receive the received call (HSS requested) Initiate a PDN disconnection with reactivation procedure (S1502), and the HSS requests a Cancel Location message or a PDN disconnect request including an identifier (eg, IMSI) and a PDN identifier (APN) of the corresponding UE (terminal A). The PDN disconnection request message is transmitted to the MME (S1503).
도 15에서는 단말 A로의 수신 콜만을 예시하고 있으나, 단말 A로부터의 발신 콜이 발생된 경우에도 동일하게 단말 A을 우선하여 재-활성이 수반된 PDN 단절(PDN disconnection with reactivation) 절차가 진행될 수 있다.In FIG. 15, only an incoming call to the terminal A is illustrated, but even when an outgoing call from the terminal A is generated, the PDN disconnection with reactivation procedure may be performed by prioritizing the terminal A in the same manner. .
HSS는 먼저 송/수신 콜이 발생된 단말이 모든 PDN 연결에 대해서 IPv6를 할당 받았는지 판단할 수 있다. 그리고, 해당 단말이 모든 PDN 연결에 대해서 IPv6를 할당 받지 않은 경우(일부의 PDN 연결에 대해서 IPv6를 할당 받은 경우), HSS는 해당 단말의 IPv4 폴백을 위해 재-활성이 수반된 PDN 단절(PDN disconnection with reactivation) 절차를 진행할 수 있다. The HSS may first determine whether the terminal where the transmit / receive call is made is allocated IPv6 for all PDN connections. And, if the UE is not assigned IPv6 for all PDN connections (if IPv6 is allocated for some PDN connections), the HSS is a PDN disconnection with re-activation for IPv4 fallback of the UE. with reactivation).
본 발명에서는 HSS에서 PDN 단절(PDN disconnection)을 요청할 수 있도록 도 15의 S1503 단계와 같이 MME와 HSS사이에 S6a 인터페이스에서 새로운 메시지(예를 들어, PDN 단절 요청(PDN disconnection request) 메시지)를 정의한다. In the present invention, a new message (for example, a PDN disconnection request message) is defined at the S6a interface between the MME and the HSS as shown in step S1503 of FIG. 15 so that the HSS may request a PDN disconnection from the HSS. .
이는 기존의 위치 취소(Cancel Location) 메시지에 새로운 원인(new cause)를 삽입하거나 혹은 베어러 비활성화(Bearer deactivation)를 명령할 수 있는 새로운 메시지를 정의함으로써 구현될 수 있다. This can be implemented by inserting a new cause into an existing Cancel Location message or by defining a new message that can command bearer deactivation.
즉, 위치 취소(Cancel Location) 메시지는 원인 값(또는 취소 타입(cancellation type))으로 '재-활성 요청이 수반된 베어러 비활성(Bearer deactivation with reactivation requested)'을 포함할 수 있다. That is, the Cancel Location message may include 'Bearer deactivation with reactivation requested' as a cause value (or cancellation type).
PDN 단절 요청(PDN disconnection request) 메시지는 재-활성(reactivation)(또는 재연결) 지시 정보를 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, PDN 단절 요청(PDN disconnection request) 메시지의 PDN 연결 해제 이유(reason for releasing PDN connection)가 재활성 요구('Reactivation required')로 설정될 수 있다. The PDN disconnection request message may include reactivation (or reconnection) indication information. For example, a reason for releasing PDN connection of a PDN disconnection request message may be set as a 'Reactivation required'.
MME는 HSS로 부터 해당 단말에 대해 위치 취소(Cancel Location) 메시지 또는 PDN 단절 요청(PDN disconnection request) 메시지를 수신하면, 해당 단말에 대하여 다른 단말보다 우선시하여 재-활성이 수반된 PDN 단절(PDN disconnection with reactivation) 절차를 수행하며(S1504), MME는 SGW에게 세션 삭제 요청(Delete Session Request) 메시지를 전송한다(S1505).When the MME receives a Cancel Location message or a PDN disconnection request message from the HSS for the UE, PDN disconnection with re-activation takes precedence over other UEs for the UE. With reactivation procedure (S1504), the MME transmits a Delete Session Request message to the SGW (S1505).
세션 삭제 요청(Delete Session Request) 메시지는 EPS 베어러 ID 등을 포함할 수 있으며, MME는 세션 삭제 요청(Delete Session Request) 메시지 전송 후 해당 단말의 EPS 베어러 컨텍스트 정보를 삭제한다. The Delete Session Request message may include an EPS bearer ID and the like, and the MME deletes EPS bearer context information of the corresponding UE after transmitting a Delete Session Request message.
SGW는 MME로부터 수신한 세션 삭제 요청(Delete Session Request) 메시지를 PGW에게 전송한다(S1506).The SGW transmits a Delete Session Request message received from the MME to the PGW (S1506).
SGW는 세션 삭제 요청(Delete Session Request) 메시지 전송 후 해당 단말의 EPS 베어러 컨텍스트 정보를 삭제한다. The SGW deletes the EPS bearer context information of the terminal after transmitting a Delete Session Request message.
PGW는 S1506 단계의 세션 삭제 요청(Delete Session Request) 메시지에 대한 응답으로 세션 삭제 응답(Delete Session Response) 메시지를 SGW에게 전송한다(S1507).The PGW transmits a Delete Session Response message to the SGW in response to the Delete Session Request message in step S1506 (S1507).
SGW는 세션 삭제 응답(Delete Session Response) 메시지 전송 후 해당 단말의 EPS 베어러 컨텍스트 정보를 삭제한다. The SGW deletes EPS bearer context information of the UE after transmitting a Delete Session Response message.
SGW는 S1505 단계의 세션 삭제 요청(Delete Session Request) 메시지에 대한 응답으로 세션 삭제 응답(Delete Session Response) 메시지를 MME에게 전송한다(S1508).The SGW transmits a Delete Session Response message to the MME in response to the Delete Session Request message in step S1505 (S1508).
MME는 해당 PDN 연결과 관련된 모든 베어러의 비활성을 요청하기 위하여 기지국에게 베어러 비활성 요청(Deactivate Bearer Request) 메시지를 전송한다(S1509).The MME transmits a bearer deactivate bearer request message to the base station in order to request deactivation of all bearers related to the corresponding PDN connection (S1509).
여기서, 베어러 비활성 요청(Deactivate Bearer Request) 메시지는 재-활성(reactivation)(또는 재연결) 지시 정보를 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 베어러 비활성 요청(Deactivate Bearer Request) 메시지의 PDN 연결 해제 이유(reason for releasing PDN connection)가 재활성 요구('Reactivation required')로 설정될 수 있다. Here, the Deactivate Bearer Request message may include reactivation (or reconnection) indication information. For example, a reason for releasing PDN connection of a Deactivate Bearer Request message may be set as a 'Reactivation required'.
기지국은 RRC 연결 재설정(RRC Connection Reconfiguration) 메시지를 단말에게 전송한다(S1510). The base station transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration message to the terminal (S1510).
RRC 연결 재설정(RRC Connection Reconfiguration) 메시지는 NAS 메시지인 EPS 베어러 컨텍스트 비활성 요청(Deactivate EPS Bearer Context Request) 메시지를 포함할 수 있다. The RRC Connection Reconfiguration message may include a Deactivate EPS Bearer Context Request message, which is a NAS message.
또한, EPS 베어러 컨텍스트 비활성 요청(Deactivate EPS Bearer Context Request) 메시지는 재-활성(reactivation)(또는 재연결) 지시 정보를 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 베어러 비활성 요청(Deactivate Bearer Request) 메시지의 PDN 연결 해제 이유(reason for releasing PDN connection)가 재활성 요구('Reactivation required')로 설정될 수 있다. In addition, the EPS bearer context deactivation request message may include reactivation (or reconnection) indication information. For example, a reason for releasing PDN connection of a Deactivate Bearer Request message may be set as a 'Reactivation required'.
단말은 RRC 연결 재설정 완료(RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete) 메시지를 기지국에게 전송하고, 단말은 해당 PDN 연결에 대한 무선 자원을 모두 해제한다(S1511).The terminal transmits an RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete message to the base station, and the terminal releases all radio resources for the corresponding PDN connection (S1511).
기지국은 S1509 단계의 베어러 비활성 요청(Deactivate Bearer Request) 메시지에 대한 응답으로 베어러 비활성 응답(Deactivate Bearer Response) 메시지를 MME에게 전송한다(S1512).The base station transmits a bearer deactivate bearer response message to the MME in response to the bearer deactivate bearer request message of step S1509 (S1512).
단말의 직접 전달(Direct Transfer) 메시지를 기지국에 전송한다(S1513). The direct transfer message of the terminal is transmitted to the base station (S1513).
직접 전달(Direct Transfer) 메시지는 NAS 메시지인 EPS 베어러 컨텍스트 비활성 승인(Deactivate EPS Bearer Context Accept) 메시지를 포함할 수 있다. The direct transfer message may include a Deactivate EPS Bearer Context Accept message, which is a NAS message.
기지국은 상향링크 NAS 전달(Uplink NAS Transport) 메시지를 MME에게 전송한다(S1514).The base station transmits an uplink NAS transport message to the MME (S1514).
상향링크 NAS 전달(Uplink NAS Transport) 메시지는 EPS 베어러 컨텍스트 비활성 승인(Deactivate EPS Bearer Context Accept) 메시지를 포함할 수 있다.The uplink NAS transport message may include a Deactivate EPS Bearer Context Accept message.
앞서 EPS 베어러 컨텍스트 비활성 요청(Deactivate EPS Bearer Context Request) 메시지가 재-활성(reactivation)(또는 재연결) 지시 정보를 포함하므로, 단말은 즉시 단절된 PDN(APN)과 PDN 연결 요청 절차(PDN connection request procedure)를 개시한다. 즉, 단말은 단절된 PDN(APN)과 앞서 도 12에서 예시된 단말 요청 PDN 연결 절차(UE requested PDN connectivity procedure)를 개시한다.Since the Deactivate EPS Bearer Context Request message previously includes reactivation (or reconnection) indication information, the UE immediately disconnects from the PDN (APN) and PDN connection request procedure (PDN connection request procedure). ). That is, the UE initiates the disconnected PDN (APN) and the UE requested PDN connectivity procedure illustrated in FIG. 12.
이 경우, IMS 수신 콜의 신속한 처리를 위해 PDN 연결 요청(PDN Connectivity Request) 메시지에 이를 명시하는 지시(예를 들어, 원인 또는 지시)를 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, PDN 연결 요청(PDN Connectivity Request) 메시지는 원인 값으로 '모바일 발신 진행(Mobile Originated progressed)', 'IP 버전 변경(IP version change)' 혹은 'PDN 타입 변경(PDN type change)' 등을 포함할 수 있다.In this case, an indication (eg, cause or indication) indicating this in a PDN Connectivity Request message may be included for rapid processing of an IMS received call. For example, the PDN Connectivity Request message may include a mobile originated progressed, an IP version change, or a PDN type change as the cause value. It may include.
이를 통해 MME에서 혼잡(congestion) 시에도 해당 단말의 PDN 연결 절차를 우선시 하여 처리할 수 있도록 한다.Through this, even in congestion in the MME, the PDN connection procedure of the corresponding UE may be prioritized and processed.
이후, 단말은 어태치 절차를 통해 IPv4 address를 할당 받는다. 즉, P-GW는 IPv6가 장애가 발생되었음을 이미 알고 있으므로, 해당 단말에게 IPv4 주소를 할당하게 된다. 이후, 단말은 IMS 수신 호를 성공적으로 처리할 수 있다.Thereafter, the terminal is assigned an IPv4 address through an attach procedure. That is, since the P-GW already knows that an IPv6 failure occurs, the P-GW allocates an IPv4 address to the corresponding UE. Thereafter, the terminal may successfully process the IMS reception call.
3) 로밍 케이스(roaming case)3) roaming case
단말이 VPLMN으로 로밍한 경우, VPLMN(Visited PLMN)에 속한 MME는 HPLMN(Home PLMN)의 특정 PDN 타입의 고장 여부를 알 수 없다. When the terminal roams to the VPLMN, the MME belonging to the VPLMN (Visited PLMN) may not know whether a specific PDN type of the HPLMN (Home PLMN) has failed.
즉, 앞서 도 14 및 15의 예시와 같이 HSS가 MME에게 디태치(detach) 및/또는 PDN 단절(PDN disconnection)을 요청하더라도, VPLMN의 P-GW가 동작 가능한 유효한 PDN 타입으로 할당하지 않을 수도 있으므로, 이에 대한 처리가 MME단에서 요구된다. That is, even if the HSS requests detach and / or PDN disconnection from the MME as shown in the examples of FIGS. 14 and 15, the P-GW of the VPLMN may not be assigned as a valid PDN type that can be operated. In this case, processing is required at the MME stage.
이에 따라, HSS가 MME에 PDN 타입을 변경하기 위하여 도 14와 같이 재-어태치가 수반된 디태치(Detach with Reattach) 또는 도 15와 같이 재-활성이 수반된 PDN 단절(PDN Disconnection with reactivation)을 요청하는 경우에 해당 단말에게 유효한 PDN 타입이 재설정(또는 재할당) 될 수 있도록 적절한 정보를 줄 수 있다. Accordingly, in order for the HSS to change the PDN type to the MME, Detach with Reattach as shown in FIG. 14 or PDN Disconnection with reactivation as shown in FIG. 15 is performed. In case of request, appropriate information may be given to the corresponding UE so that a valid PDN type may be reset (or reassigned).
즉, 앞서 도 14의 S1402 단계에서 위치 취소(Cancel Location) 메시지 또는 앞서 도 15의 S1502 단계에서 위치 취소(Cancel Location) 메시지/PDN 단절 요청(PDN disconnection request) 메시지는 유효한 PDN 타입에 대한 정보를 포함할 수 있다. That is, the location cancellation (Cancel Location) message in step S1402 of FIG. 14 or the location cancellation (Cancel Location) message / PDN disconnection request message in step S1502 of FIG. 15 includes information on a valid PDN type. can do.
여기서, 유효한 PDN 타입에 대한 정보는 현재 장애가 발생하여 재설정이 바람직하지 않은 PDN 타입이 지시될 수도 있으며, 또는 정상 동작이 가능한 PDN 타입이 지시될 수도 있다. In this case, the information on the valid PDN type may indicate a PDN type in which a current failure occurs and thus the reset is not preferable, or a PDN type capable of normal operation may be indicated.
위와 같이, MME는 유효한 PDN 타입에 대한 정보와 함께 디태치(Detach) 또는 PDN 단절(PDN Disconnection)을 요청 받으면 유효한 PDN 타입에 대한 정보(즉, 정상 동작이 가능한 PDN 타입에 대한 정보)를 MME에 일정시간 저장할 수 있다. As above, when the MME receives a request for detach or PDN disconnection together with information on a valid PDN type, the MME sends information on a valid PDN type (ie, information on a PDN type that can operate normally) to the MME. Can save for a certain time.
이후, MME는 해당 단말이 다시 어태치(Attach)하거나 PDN 연결(PDN Connectivity) 재설정 시 단말을 정상 동작이 가능한 PDN 타입이 할당되도록 설정할 수 있다. 이때, MME는 단말이 요구하는 PDN 타입과 무관하게 정상 동작이 가능한 PDN 타입이 할당되도록 설정할 수 있다. 예를 들어, MME가 HSS로부터 제공받은 가입된 PDN 타입(Subscribed PDN type) 값에서 유효하지 않은 PDN 타입을 제외하고, P-GW 및 PDN 설정 시 사용할 수 있다. 또한, MME가 적절한 PDN 타입을 지원하는 P-GW를 선택할 수도 있다. 결국, 해당 단말에 의한 어태치(Attach) 절차 또는 PDN 연결(PDN Connectivity) 절차 중에, MME에 의해 해당 단말은 유효한 PDN 타입을 할당하는 P-GW로 접속될 수 있다. Thereafter, the MME may be configured to assign a PDN type capable of normal operation of the terminal when the terminal is attached (attach) again or PDN connectivity (PDN Connectivity) reset. In this case, the MME may be configured to allocate a PDN type capable of normal operation regardless of the PDN type requested by the UE. For example, the MME may be used to configure the P-GW and PDN except for an invalid PDN type in the subscribed PDN type value provided from the HSS. In addition, the MME may select a P-GW supporting an appropriate PDN type. As a result, during the attach procedure or the PDN connectivity procedure by the terminal, the terminal may be connected to the P-GW which allocates a valid PDN type by the MME.
특히, 이러한 제안된 방법은 LBO(Local Break Out) 등의 로밍 상황에서 보다 유효하게 이용될 수 있다. LBO 상황에서는 P-GW가 HPLMN에 속하지 않고 VPLMN에만 속한다. 일반적으로, P-GW에서 IP 주소 풀(pool)을 가지고 IPv4 IPv6로 할지 결정할 수 있으나, LBO 상황에서 VPLMN에 속한 P-GW는 IPv6가 장애가 발생되었는지 알 수 없다. 따라서, HSS가 VPLMN에 속한 MME에게 해당 단말은 IPv4을 할당하여야 한다는 것을 알려주고, 해당 단말이 VPLMN에 속한 P-GW를 통해 PDN 연결을 확립할 때 해당 P-GW가 IPv4 주소를 할당하도록 한다. In particular, this proposed method can be used more effectively in roaming situations such as LBO (Local Break Out). In the LBO situation, the P-GW does not belong to the HPLMN, only to the VPLMN. In general, the P-GW can decide whether to use IPv4 IPv6 with a pool of IP addresses, but in the LBO situation, the P-GW belonging to the VPLMN cannot know whether IPv6 has failed. Accordingly, the HSS informs the MME belonging to the VPLMN that the UE should allocate IPv4, and when the UE establishes a PDN connection through the P-GW belonging to the VPLMN, the P-GW allocates an IPv4 address.
또한, 사업자마다 다양한 방식으로 운용되는 경우, 명시적으로 유효하지 않은 PDN 타입을 알려주거나 유효한 PDN 타입만을 VPLMN에 속한 MME로 알려줌으로써, 보다 안전하게 PDN 타입 장애(failure) 문제를 해결할 수 있다.In addition, when operating in various ways for each operator, it is possible to more safely solve the PDN type failure (failure) problem by informing the MME belonging to the VPLMN to inform the PDN type that is not explicitly valid or only valid PDN type.
도 16은 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따른 PDN 타입 폴백 방법을 예시하는 도면이다. 16 is a diagram illustrating a PDN type fallback method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
도 16에서는 제1 PDN 타입(예를 들어, IPv6)이 장애가 발생되고, 제2 PDN 타입(예를 들어, IPv4)은 정상 동작이 가능하다고 가정한다. In FIG. 16, it is assumed that a first PDN type (for example, IPv6) fails and a second PDN type (for example, IPv4) can operate normally.
도 16을 참조하면, HSS는 제1 PDN 타입의 장애 발생을 감지한 후, 음성 콜(voice call) 송수신이 있는 단말이 있는 경우, 우선적으로 해당 단말에 의해 확립된 PDN 연결을 위해 할당된 PDN 타입이 모두 제1 PDN 타입인지 여부를 판단한다(S1601).Referring to FIG. 16, after detecting an occurrence of a failure of a first PDN type, the HSS preferentially allocates a PDN type allocated for a PDN connection established by the terminal when there is a terminal having voice call transmission and reception. It is determined whether all of them are the first PDN type (S1601).
HSS는 단말의 PDN 연결에 할당된 PDN 타입이 모두 제1 PDN 타입인지 여부에 따라 재-어태치가 수반된 디태치(Detach with re-attach) 절차 또는 재-활성이 수반된 단절(Disconnection with re-activation) 절차 중 어느 하나를 결정한다(S1602).The HSS performs a detach with re-attach procedure or disconnection with re-activation depending on whether all PDN types allocated to the PDN connection of the UE are the first PDN type. One of the activation procedures is determined (S1602).
그리고, HSS는 S1602 단계에서 결정된 절차를 개시한다(S1603).In addition, the HSS starts the procedure determined in step S1602 (S1603).
여기서, 단말의 PDN 연결에 할당된 PDN 타입이 모두 제1 PDN 타입인 경우, HSS는 PDN 타입 fallback을 위하여 재-어태치가 수반된 디태치(Detach with re-attach) 절차를 결정할 수 있다. 이 경우, 앞서 도 14의 예시에 따른 절차가 개시될 수 있다. Here, when the PDN types allocated to the PDN connection of the UE are all the first PDN type, the HSS may determine a detach with re-attach procedure with the re-attach for the PDN type fallback. In this case, the procedure according to the example of FIG. 14 may be started.
반면, 단말의 PDN 연결에 할당된 PDN 타입이 모두 제1 PDN 타입이 아닌 경우, HSS는 PDN 타입 fallback을 위하여 제1 PDN 타입이 할당된 특정 PDN에 대하여 재-활성이 수반된 단절(Disconnection with re-activation) 절차를 결정할 수 있다. 이 경우, 앞서 도 15의 예시에 따른 절차가 개시될 수 있다.On the other hand, when all of the PDN types allocated to the PDN connection of the UE are not the first PDN type, the HSS is disconnected with re-activation with respect to a specific PDN to which the first PDN type is allocated for the PDN type fallback. -activation) procedure. In this case, the procedure according to the example of FIG. 15 may be disclosed.
본 발명이 적용될 수 있는 장치 일반General apparatus to which the present invention can be applied
도 17은 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따른 통신 장치의 블록 구성도를 예시한다.17 illustrates a block diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
도 17을 참조하면, 무선 통신 시스템은 네트워크 노드(1710)와 다수의 단말(UE)(1720)을 포함한다. Referring to FIG. 17, a wireless communication system includes a
네트워크 노드(1710)는 프로세서(processor, 1711), 메모리(memory, 1712) 및 통신 모듈(communication module, 1713)을 포함한다. 프로세서(1711)는 앞서 도 1 내지 도 16에서 제안된 기능, 과정 및/또는 방법을 구현한다. 유/무선 인터페이스 프로토콜의 계층들은 프로세서(1711)에 의해 구현될 수 있다. 메모리(1712)는 프로세서(1711)와 연결되어, 프로세서(1711)를 구동하기 위한 다양한 정보를 저장한다. 통신 모듈(1713)은 프로세서(1711)와 연결되어, 유/무선 신호를 송신 및/또는 수신한다. 네트워크 노드(1710)의 일례로, 기지국, MME, HSS, SGW, PGW, 어플리케이션 서버 등이 이에 해당될 수 있다. 특히, 네트워크 노드(1710)가 기지국인 경우, 통신 모듈(1713)은 무선 신호를 송/수신하기 위한 RF부(radio frequency unit)을 포함할 수 있다.The
단말(1720)은 프로세서(1721), 메모리(1722) 및 통신 모듈(또는 RF부)(1723)을 포함한다. 프로세서(1721)는 앞서 도 1 내지 도 16에서 제안된 기능, 과정 및/또는 방법을 구현한다. 무선 인터페이스 프로토콜의 계층들은 프로세서(1721)에 의해 구현될 수 있다. 메모리(1722)는 프로세서(1721)와 연결되어, 프로세서(1721)를 구동하기 위한 다양한 정보를 저장한다. 통신 모듈(1723)는 프로세서(1721)와 연결되어, 무선 신호를 송신 및/또는 수신한다.The terminal 1720 includes a
메모리(1712, 1722)는 프로세서(1711, 1721) 내부 또는 외부에 있을 수 있고, 잘 알려진 다양한 수단으로 프로세서(1711, 1721)와 연결될 수 있다. 또한, 네트워크 노드(1710)(기지국인 경우) 및/또는 단말(1720)은 한 개의 안테나(single antenna) 또는 다중 안테나(multiple antenna)를 가질 수 있다.The
도 18은 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따른 통신 장치의 블록 구성도를 예시한다.18 illustrates a block diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
특히, 도 18에서는 앞서 도 17의 단말을 보다 상세히 예시하는 도면이다. In particular, FIG. 18 illustrates the terminal of FIG. 17 in more detail.
도 18을 참조하면, 단말은 프로세서(또는 디지털 신호 프로세서(DSP: digital signal processor)(1810), RF 모듈(RF module)(또는 RF 유닛)(1835), 파워 관리 모듈(power management module)(1805), 안테나(antenna)(1840), 배터리(battery)(1855), 디스플레이(display)(1815), 키패드(keypad)(1820), 메모리(memory)(1830), 심카드(SIM(Subscriber Identification Module) card)(1825)(이 구성은 선택적임), 스피커(speaker)(1845) 및 마이크로폰(microphone)(1850)을 포함하여 구성될 수 있다. 단말은 또한 단일의 안테나 또는 다중의 안테나를 포함할 수 있다. Referring to FIG. 18, a terminal may include a processor (or a digital signal processor (DSP) 1810, an RF module (or RF unit) 1835, and a power management module 1805). ),
프로세서(1810)는 앞서 도 1 내지 도 16에서 제안된 기능, 과정 및/또는 방법을 구현한다. 무선 인터페이스 프로토콜의 계층은 프로세서(1810)에 의해 구현될 수 있다. The
메모리(1830)는 프로세서(1810)와 연결되고, 프로세서(1810)의 동작과 관련된 정보를 저장한다. 메모리(1830)는 프로세서(1810) 내부 또는 외부에 있을 수 있고, 잘 알려진 다양한 수단으로 프로세서(1810)와 연결될 수 있다.The
사용자는 예를 들어, 키패드(1820)의 버튼을 누르거나(혹은 터치하거나) 또는 마이크로폰(1850)를 이용한 음성 구동(voice activation)에 의해 전화 번호 등과 같은 명령 정보를 입력한다. 프로세서(1810)는 이러한 명령 정보를 수신하고, 전화 번호로 전화를 거는 등 적절한 기능을 수행하도록 처리한다. 구동 상의 데이터(operational data)는 심카드(1830) 또는 메모리(1830)로부터 추출할 수 있다. 또한, 프로세서(1810)는 사용자가 인지하고 또한 편의를 위해 명령 정보 또는 구동 정보를 디스플레이(1815) 상에 디스플레이할 수 있다. The user enters command information such as a telephone number, for example, by pressing (or touching) a button on
RF 모듈(1835)는 프로세서(1810)에 연결되어, RF 신호를 송신 및/또는 수신한다. 프로세서(1810)는 통신을 개시하기 위하여 예를 들어, 음성 통신 데이터를 구성하는 무선 신호를 전송하도록 명령 정보를 RF 모듈(1835)에 전달한다. RF 모듈(1835)은 무선 신호를 수신 및 송신하기 위하여 수신기(receiver) 및 전송기(transmitter)로 구성된다. 안테나(1840)는 무선 신호를 송신 및 수신하는 기능을 한다. 무선 신호를 수신할 때, RF 모듈(1835)은 프로세서(1810)에 의해 처리하기 위하여 신호를 전달하고 기저 대역으로 신호를 변환할 수 있다. 처리된 신호는 스피커(1845)를 통해 출력되는 가청 또는 가독 정보로 변환될 수 있다. The
이상에서 설명된 실시예들은 본 발명의 구성요소들과 특징들이 소정 형태로 결합된 것들이다. 각 구성요소 또는 특징은 별도의 명시적 언급이 없는 한 선택적인 것으로 고려되어야 한다. 각 구성요소 또는 특징은 다른 구성요소나 특징과 결합되지 않은 형태로 실시될 수 있다. 또한, 일부 구성요소들 및/또는 특징들을 결합하여 본 발명의 실시예를 구성하는 것도 가능하다. 본 발명의 실시예들에서 설명되는 동작들의 순서는 변경될 수 있다. 어느 실시예의 일부 구성이나 특징은 다른 실시예에 포함될 수 있고, 또는 다른 실시예의 대응하는 구성 또는 특징과 교체될 수 있다. 특허청구범위에서 명시적인 인용 관계가 있지 않은 청구항들을 결합하여 실시예를 구성하거나 출원 후의 보정에 의해 새로운 청구항으로 포함시킬 수 있음은 자명하다.The embodiments described above are the components and features of the present invention are combined in a predetermined form. Each component or feature is to be considered optional unless stated otherwise. Each component or feature may be embodied in a form that is not combined with other components or features. It is also possible to combine some of the components and / or features to form an embodiment of the invention. The order of the operations described in the embodiments of the present invention may be changed. Some components or features of one embodiment may be included in another embodiment or may be replaced with corresponding components or features of another embodiment. It is obvious that the claims may be combined to form an embodiment by combining claims that do not have an explicit citation relationship in the claims or as new claims by post-application correction.
본 발명에 따른 실시예는 다양한 수단, 예를 들어, 하드웨어, 펌웨어(firmware), 소프트웨어 또는 그것들의 결합 등에 의해 구현될 수 있다. 하드웨어에 의한 구현의 경우, 본 발명의 일 실시예는 하나 또는 그 이상의 ASICs(application specific integrated circuits), DSPs(digital signal processors), DSPDs(digital signal processing devices), PLDs(programmable logic devices), FPGAs(field programmable gate arrays), 프로세서, 콘트롤러, 마이크로 콘트롤러, 마이크로 프로세서 등에 의해 구현될 수 있다.Embodiments according to the present invention may be implemented by various means, for example, hardware, firmware, software, or a combination thereof. In the case of a hardware implementation, an embodiment of the present invention may include one or more application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), digital signal processors (DSPs), digital signal processing devices (DSPDs), programmable logic devices (PLDs), FPGAs ( field programmable gate arrays), processors, controllers, microcontrollers, microprocessors, and the like.
펌웨어나 소프트웨어에 의한 구현의 경우, 본 발명의 일 실시예는 이상에서 설명된 기능 또는 동작들을 수행하는 모듈, 절차, 함수 등의 형태로 구현될 수 있다. 소프트웨어 코드는 메모리에 저장되어 프로세서에 의해 구동될 수 있다. 상기 메모리는 상기 프로세서 내부 또는 외부에 위치하여, 이미 공지된 다양한 수단에 의해 상기 프로세서와 데이터를 주고 받을 수 있다.In the case of implementation by firmware or software, an embodiment of the present invention may be implemented in the form of a module, procedure, function, etc. that performs the functions or operations described above. The software code may be stored in memory and driven by the processor. The memory may be located inside or outside the processor, and may exchange data with the processor by various known means.
본 발명은 본 발명의 필수적 특징을 벗어나지 않는 범위에서 다른 특정한 형태로 구체화될 수 있음은 당업자에게 자명하다. 따라서, 상술한 상세한 설명은 모든 면에서 제한적으로 해석되어서는 아니 되고 예시적인 것으로 고려되어야 한다. 본 발명의 범위는 첨부된 청구항의 합리적 해석에 의해 결정되어야 하고, 본 발명의 등가적 범위 내에서의 모든 변경은 본 발명의 범위에 포함된다. It will be apparent to those skilled in the art that the present invention may be embodied in other specific forms without departing from the essential features of the present invention. Accordingly, the above detailed description should not be construed as limiting in all aspects and should be considered as illustrative. The scope of the invention should be determined by reasonable interpretation of the appended claims, and all changes within the equivalent scope of the invention are included in the scope of the invention.
본 발명의 무선 통신 시스템에서 PDN 타입 폴백(fallback)을 수행하는 방안은 3GPP LTE/LTE-A 시스템에 적용되는 예를 중심으로 설명하였으나, 3GPP LTE/LTE-A 시스템 이외에도 다양한 무선 통신 시스템에 적용하는 것이 가능하다.The method of performing PDN type fallback in the wireless communication system of the present invention has been described with reference to the example applied to the 3GPP LTE / LTE-A system, but is applicable to various wireless communication systems in addition to the 3GPP LTE / LTE-A system. It is possible.
Claims (12)
Applications Claiming Priority (4)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| US201462067426P | 2014-10-22 | 2014-10-22 | |
| US62/067,426 | 2014-10-22 | ||
| US201562157968P | 2015-05-07 | 2015-05-07 | |
| US62/157,968 | 2015-05-07 |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2016064201A1 true WO2016064201A1 (en) | 2016-04-28 |
Family
ID=55761161
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/KR2015/011168 Ceased WO2016064201A1 (en) | 2014-10-22 | 2015-10-21 | Pdn type fallback method in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor |
Country Status (1)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| WO (1) | WO2016064201A1 (en) |
Cited By (3)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN108243442A (en) * | 2016-12-27 | 2018-07-03 | 中国移动通信集团浙江有限公司 | Method and device for analysis and processing of wireless communication network standard fallback |
| CN113767652A (en) * | 2019-04-02 | 2021-12-07 | Lg电子株式会社 | Method for handling network failures |
| US11375576B2 (en) | 2017-05-09 | 2022-06-28 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Selection of IP version |
Citations (5)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| WO2012050841A1 (en) * | 2010-09-28 | 2012-04-19 | Research In Motion Corporation | Method and apparatus for releasing connection with local gw when ue moves out of the residential/enterprise network coverage |
| US20120307621A1 (en) * | 2011-06-02 | 2012-12-06 | Qualcomm Incorporated | System, apparatus, and method for reducing recovery failure delay in wireless communication systems |
| US20120314562A1 (en) * | 2011-06-09 | 2012-12-13 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Methods and apparatus for enabling fallback to a second data service based on the presence of fallback conditions associated with establishment of a data context with a first data service |
| US20140051443A1 (en) * | 2012-02-29 | 2014-02-20 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) | Methods and Apparatus for Enhancing Circuit-Switched Call Fallback (CSFB) Service for a Shared Network Node |
| US8817600B2 (en) * | 2009-01-13 | 2014-08-26 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Protocol fallback technique for wireless data communications |
-
2015
- 2015-10-21 WO PCT/KR2015/011168 patent/WO2016064201A1/en not_active Ceased
Patent Citations (5)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US8817600B2 (en) * | 2009-01-13 | 2014-08-26 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Protocol fallback technique for wireless data communications |
| WO2012050841A1 (en) * | 2010-09-28 | 2012-04-19 | Research In Motion Corporation | Method and apparatus for releasing connection with local gw when ue moves out of the residential/enterprise network coverage |
| US20120307621A1 (en) * | 2011-06-02 | 2012-12-06 | Qualcomm Incorporated | System, apparatus, and method for reducing recovery failure delay in wireless communication systems |
| US20120314562A1 (en) * | 2011-06-09 | 2012-12-13 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Methods and apparatus for enabling fallback to a second data service based on the presence of fallback conditions associated with establishment of a data context with a first data service |
| US20140051443A1 (en) * | 2012-02-29 | 2014-02-20 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) | Methods and Apparatus for Enhancing Circuit-Switched Call Fallback (CSFB) Service for a Shared Network Node |
Cited By (6)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN108243442A (en) * | 2016-12-27 | 2018-07-03 | 中国移动通信集团浙江有限公司 | Method and device for analysis and processing of wireless communication network standard fallback |
| US11375576B2 (en) | 2017-05-09 | 2022-06-28 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Selection of IP version |
| US11659621B2 (en) | 2017-05-09 | 2023-05-23 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Selection of IP version |
| AU2021221761B2 (en) * | 2017-05-09 | 2023-08-10 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Selection of ip version |
| CN113767652A (en) * | 2019-04-02 | 2021-12-07 | Lg电子株式会社 | Method for handling network failures |
| CN113767652B (en) * | 2019-04-02 | 2024-05-03 | Lg电子株式会社 | Method for handling network faults |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| WO2018155908A1 (en) | Method for transmitting or receiving data through relay in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor | |
| WO2018147698A1 (en) | Method for transmitting/receiving nas message in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor | |
| WO2018044144A1 (en) | Method for performing service request procedure in wireless communication system and device therefor | |
| WO2016111591A1 (en) | Method for transmitting paging in wireless communication system and device therefor | |
| WO2018164552A1 (en) | Method for transmitting and receiving data using relay in wireless communication system, and apparatus therefor | |
| WO2016190641A1 (en) | Method for transmitting and receiving data in wireless communication system, and device therefor | |
| WO2018174525A1 (en) | Method for interaction between layers in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor | |
| WO2016114611A1 (en) | Method for updating area in wireless communication system, and device therefor | |
| WO2016099138A1 (en) | Method for transmitting paging in wireless communication system, and apparatus therefor | |
| WO2018117774A1 (en) | Method for performing v2x communication in wireless communication system and device for same | |
| WO2016208997A1 (en) | Method for managing area of terminal in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor | |
| WO2017188758A1 (en) | Method and apparatus for suspending/resuming nas signaling in wireless communication system | |
| WO2017003235A1 (en) | Method for group message transmission in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor | |
| WO2017126884A1 (en) | Method for controlling congestion in wireless communication system and device for same | |
| WO2018080230A1 (en) | Method for determining emm mode in wireless communication system, and apparatus therefor | |
| WO2018128505A1 (en) | Method for transmitting and receiving data through relay in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor | |
| WO2017086717A1 (en) | Method for supporting extended idle mode discontinuous reception activation in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor | |
| WO2018079947A1 (en) | Method for supporting ue mobility in wireless communication system and device therefor | |
| WO2019054783A1 (en) | Method for performing v2x communication in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor | |
| WO2017200269A1 (en) | Mobile-terminated data control method in wireless communication system and device therefor | |
| WO2018231029A1 (en) | Method for registering terminal in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor | |
| WO2018231027A1 (en) | Method for registering terminal in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor | |
| WO2016024789A1 (en) | Method for monitoring ue reachability in wireless communication system, and device for same | |
| WO2018110939A1 (en) | Method for allocating tracking area in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor | |
| WO2016153316A1 (en) | Method for monitoring ue reachability in wireless communication system, and apparatus therefor |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| 121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 15852821 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
| NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
| 122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 15852821 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |